Remove non-standard @newin doxygen token

We are not interested in which version a given GTK method
was added.

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/color.h

@@ -216,8 +216,6 @@ public:
    * where r, g and b are hex digits representing the red, green and blue components respectively.
    *
    * @result The string representation.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   Glib::ustring to_string() const;
 

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/colormap.h

@@ -190,16 +190,12 @@ public:
   
   
   /** Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The screen for which this colormap was created.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_screen();
   
   /** Gets the screen for which this colormap was created.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The screen for which this colormap was created.
    */

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/cursor.h

@@ -204,16 +204,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the display on which the Gdk::Cursor is defined.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated to @a cursor.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Display> get_display();
   
   /** Returns the display on which the Gdk::Cursor is defined.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated to @a cursor.
    */
@@ -226,8 +222,6 @@ public:
    * on the cursor, GDK may not be able to obtain the image data. In this 
    * case, <tt>0</tt> is returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf representing @a cursor, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_image();
@@ -238,16 +232,12 @@ public:
    * on the cursor, GDK may not be able to obtain the image data. In this 
    * case, <tt>0</tt> is returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf representing @a cursor, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Pixbuf> get_image() const;
   
   
   /** Returns the cursor type for this cursor.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::CursorType.
    */

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/device.h

@@ -183,8 +183,6 @@ public:
   /** If @a index has a valid keyval, this function will
    * fill in @a keyval and @a modifiers with the keyval settings.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param index The index of the macro button to get.
    * @param keyval Return value for the keyval.
    * @param modifiers Return value for modifiers.
@@ -194,8 +192,6 @@ public:
   void set_key(guint index_, guint keyval, ModifierType modifiers);
   
   /** Returns the axis use for @a index.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @param index The index of the axis.
    * @return A Gdk::AxisUse specifying how the axis is used.
@@ -242,32 +238,24 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Determines the name of the device.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A name.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_name() const;
   
   /** Determines the type of the device.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::InputSource.
    */
   InputSource get_source() const;
   
   /** Determines the mode of the device.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::InputSource.
    */
   InputMode get_mode() const;
   
   /** Determines whether the pointer follows device motion.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the pointer follows device motion.
    */
@@ -275,8 +263,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the number of axes of a device.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return The number of axes of @a device.
    */

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/display.h

@@ -115,8 +115,6 @@ protected:
 public:
   
   /** Opens a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param display_name The name of the display to open.
    * @return A Gdk::Display, or <tt>0</tt> if the display
@@ -126,8 +124,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the name of the display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return A string representing the display name. This string is owned
    * by GDK and should not be modified or freed.
@@ -136,16 +132,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the number of screen managed by the @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return Number of screens.
    */
   int get_n_screens() const;
   
   /** Returns a screen object for one of the screens of the display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param screen_num The screen number.
    * @return The Gdk::Screen object.
@@ -153,8 +145,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_screen(int screen_num);
   
   /** Returns a screen object for one of the screens of the display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param screen_num The screen number.
    * @return The Gdk::Screen object.
@@ -163,16 +153,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Get the default Gdk::Screen for @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default Gdk::Screen object for @a display.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_default_screen();
   
   /** Get the default Gdk::Screen for @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default Gdk::Screen object for @a display.
    */
@@ -180,32 +166,24 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Release any pointer grab.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param timestamp A timestap (e.g. GDK_CURRENT_TIME).
    */
   void pointer_ungrab(guint32 timestamp);
   
   /** Release any keyboard grab
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param timestamp A timestap (e.g Gdk::CURRENT_TIME).
    */
   void keyboard_ungrab(guint32 timestamp);
   
   /** Test if the pointer is grabbed.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if an active X pointer grab is in effect.
    */
   bool pointer_is_grabbed() const;
   
   /** Emits a short beep on @a display
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    */
   void beep();
   
@@ -218,15 +196,11 @@ public:
    * 
    * This is most useful for X11. On windowing systems where requests are
    * handled synchronously, this function will do nothing.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    */
   void sync();
   
   /** Closes the connection to the windowing system for the given display,
    * and cleans up associated resources.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    */
   void close();
 
@@ -234,8 +208,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the list of available input devices attached to @a display.
    * The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A list of Gdk::Device.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr<Device> > list_devices();
@@ -243,8 +215,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the list of available input devices attached to @a display.
    * The list is statically allocated and should not be freed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A list of Gdk::Device.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr<const Device> > list_devices() const;
@@ -255,8 +225,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the next Gdk::Event to be processed for @a display, fetching events from the
    * windowing system if necessary.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The next Gdk::Event to be processed, or <tt>0</tt> if no events
    * are pending. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with Gdk::Event::free().
    */
@@ -265,8 +233,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the next Gdk::Event to be processed for @a display, fetching events from the
    * windowing system if necessary.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The next Gdk::Event to be processed, or <tt>0</tt> if no events
    * are pending. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with Gdk::Event::free().
    */
@@ -278,8 +244,6 @@ public:
    * not get more events from the windowing system.  It only checks the events
    * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A copy of the first Gdk::Event on the event queue, or <tt>0</tt> 
    * if no events are in the queue. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with
    * Gdk::Event::free().
@@ -291,8 +255,6 @@ public:
    * not get more events from the windowing system.  It only checks the events
    * that have already been moved to the GDK event queue.)
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A copy of the first Gdk::Event on the event queue, or <tt>0</tt> 
    * if no events are in the queue. The returned Gdk::Event should be freed with
    * Gdk::Event::free().
@@ -302,8 +264,6 @@ public:
   /** Appends a copy of the given event onto the front of the event
    * queue for @a display.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param event A Gdk::Event.
    */
   void put_event(GdkEvent* event);
@@ -315,8 +275,6 @@ public:
    * See Gdk::Window::add_filter() if you are interested in filtering other
    * types of events.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param message_type The type of ClientMessage events to receive.
    * This will be checked against the @a message_type field 
    * of the XClientMessage event struct.
@@ -331,8 +289,6 @@ public:
    * Applications should <em>not</em> set this, it is a global 
    * user-configured setting.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param msec Double click time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second).
    */
   void set_double_click_time(guint msec);
@@ -343,8 +299,6 @@ public:
    * Applications should <em>not</em> set this, it is a global 
    * user-configured setting.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param distance Distance in pixels.
    */
   void set_double_click_distance(guint distance);
@@ -354,8 +308,6 @@ public:
    * function for
    * <tt>gdk_display_manager_get_default_display (manager_get())</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Display, or <tt>0</tt> if there is no default
    * display.
    */
@@ -363,8 +315,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the core pointer device for the given display
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The core pointer device; this is owned by the
    * display and should not be freed.
@@ -372,8 +322,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Device> get_core_pointer();
   
   /** Returns the core pointer device for the given display
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The core pointer device; this is owned by the
    * display and should not be freed.
@@ -409,8 +357,6 @@ public:
    * if the window under the mouse pointer is not known to GDK (for example, 
    * belongs to another application).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param win_x Return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative
    * to the window origin, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param win_y Return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative
@@ -424,8 +370,6 @@ public:
    * if the window under the mouse pointer is not known to GDK (for example, 
    * belongs to another application).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param win_x Return location for x coordinate of the pointer location relative
    * to the window origin, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param win_y Return location for y coordinate of the pointer location relative
@@ -461,8 +405,6 @@ public:
    * some rare use cases like keyboard navigation support
    * for the color picker in the Gtk::ColorSelectionDialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param screen The screen of @a display to warp the pointer to.
    * @param x The x coordinate of the destination.
    * @param y The y coordinate of the destination.
@@ -478,8 +420,6 @@ public:
    * event recorder. Applications should never have any
    * reason to use this facility.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param new_hooks A table of pointers to functions for getting
    * quantities related to the current pointer position.
    * @return The previous pointer hook table.
@@ -512,7 +452,6 @@ public:
 
   /** Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
    *
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * @deprecated Use the version that takes a GdkNativeWindow.
    * @param xid The X id of the destination window.
    * @param protocol Location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
@@ -531,8 +470,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Finds out the DND protocol supported by a window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param xid The windowing system id of the destination window.
    * @param protocol Location where the supported DND protocol is returned.
@@ -544,16 +481,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display.
    */
   GdkKeymap* get_keymap();
   
   /** Returns the Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Keymap attached to @a display.
    */
@@ -565,7 +498,6 @@ public:
 #ifdef G_OS_WIN32
   /** Send a response to SelectionRequest event.
    *
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * @param requestor Window to which to deliver response.
    * @param selection Selection that was requested.
    * @param target Target that was selected.
@@ -582,7 +514,6 @@ public:
 
   /** Send a response to SelectionRequest event.
    *
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * @param requestor Window to which to deliver response.
    * @param selection Selection that was requested.
    * @param target Target that was selected.
@@ -598,8 +529,6 @@ public:
    * For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
    * <type>XID</type>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param anid A native pixmap handle.
    * @return The Gdk::Pixmap wrapper for the native pixmap,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if there is none.
@@ -611,8 +540,6 @@ public:
    * For example in the X backend, a native pixmap handle is an Xlib
    * <type>XID</type>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param anid A native pixmap handle.
    * @return The Gdk::Pixmap wrapper for the native pixmap,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if there is none.
@@ -629,8 +556,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This is most useful for X11. On windowing systems where requests are
    * handled synchronously, this function will do nothing.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void flush();
   
@@ -638,8 +563,6 @@ public:
    * on @a display. Otherwise, cursors are restricted to bilevel 
    * alpha (i.e. a mask).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return Whether cursors can have alpha channels.
    */
   bool supports_cursor_alpha() const;
@@ -648,23 +571,17 @@ public:
    * on @a display. Otherwise, cursors have only a forground
    * and a background color.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return Whether cursors can have multiple colors.
    */
   bool supports_cursor_color() const;
   
   /** Returns the default size to use for cursors on @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The default cursor size.
    */
   guint get_default_cursor_size() const;
   
   /** Gets the maximal size to use for cursors on @a display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param width The return location for the maximal cursor width.
    * @param height The return location for the maximal cursor height.
@@ -676,8 +593,6 @@ public:
    * on @a display. This window is implicitly created by GDK. 
    * See Gdk::Window::set_group().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The default group leader window for @a display.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_default_group();
@@ -686,8 +601,6 @@ public:
    * on @a display. This window is implicitly created by GDK. 
    * See Gdk::Window::set_group().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The default group leader window for @a display.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Window> get_default_group() const;
@@ -698,8 +611,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will be 
    * sent when the owner of a selection changes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return Whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will 
    * be sent.
    */
@@ -708,8 +619,6 @@ public:
   /** Request Gdk::EventOwnerChange events for ownership changes
    * of the selection named by the given atom.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param selection The Gdk::Atom naming the selection for which
    * ownership change notification is requested.
    * @return Whether Gdk::EventOwnerChange events will 
@@ -723,8 +632,6 @@ public:
    * application has quit. On X11 this checks if a clipboard daemon is
    * running.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the display supports clipboard persistance.
    */
   bool supports_clipboard_persistence() const;
@@ -733,8 +640,6 @@ public:
    * saving all available targets.
    * On X11, this is a special program that works according to the freedesktop clipboard specification,
    * available at http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/clipboard-manager-spec.
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   *
    * @param clipboard_window A Gdk::Window belonging to the clipboard owner.
    * @param time_ A timestamp.
    */
@@ -746,8 +651,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns <tt>true</tt> if Gdk::Window::shape_combine_mask() can
    * be used to create shaped windows on @a display.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if shaped windows are supported.
    */
   bool supports_shapes() const;
@@ -755,8 +658,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns <tt>true</tt> if Gdk::Window::input_shape_combine_mask() can
    * be used to modify the input shape of windows on @a display.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if windows with modified input shape are supported.
    */
   bool supports_input_shapes() const;
@@ -767,8 +668,6 @@ public:
    * Currently this only works on X11 with XComposite and
    * XDamage extensions available.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if windows may be composited.
    */
   bool supports_composite() const;

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/displaymanager.h

@@ -105,8 +105,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the singleton Gdk::DisplayManager object.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The global Gdk::DisplayManager singleton; gdk_parse_pargs(),
    * gdk_init(), or gdk_init_check() must have been called first.
@@ -114,8 +112,6 @@ public:
   static Glib::RefPtr<DisplayManager> get();
   
   /** Gets the default Gdk::Display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Display, or <tt>0</tt> if there is no default
    * display.
@@ -123,8 +119,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Display> get_default_display();
   
   /** Gets the default Gdk::Display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Display, or <tt>0</tt> if there is no default
    * display.
@@ -133,8 +127,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets @a display as the default display.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param display A Gdk::Display.
    */
@@ -142,8 +134,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** List all currently open displays.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return A list of Gdk::Display objects.
    */
@@ -165,8 +155,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** The display_opened signal is emitted when a display is opened.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,2}
    *
    * @param display the opened display
    *

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/dragcontext.h

@@ -308,16 +308,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the Gdk::Window where the DND operation started.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_source_window();
   
   /** Returns the Gdk::Window where the DND operation started.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Window.
    */
@@ -345,15 +341,11 @@ public:
   /** Determines the bitmask of actions proposed by the source if
    * gdk_drag_context_suggested_action() returns GDK_ACTION_ASK.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return The Gdk::DragAction flags.
    */
   DragAction get_actions() const;
   
   /** Determines the suggested drag action of the context.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::DragAction value.
    */
@@ -363,8 +355,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Determines the action chosen by the drag destination.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @deprecated Use get_selected_action()
    * 
@@ -375,8 +365,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Determines the action chosen by the drag destination.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::DragAction value.
    */
@@ -394,8 +382,6 @@ public:
    * This function is called by the drag source to obtain the 
    *  @a dest_window and @a protocol parameters for gdk_drag_motion().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param drag_window A window which may be at the pointer position, but
    * should be ignored, since it is put up by the drag source as an icon.
    * @param screen The screen where the destination window is sought.

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/drawable.h

@@ -573,8 +573,6 @@ public:
    * support can be turned off by setting the GDK_DISABLE_MEDIALIB environment
    * variable.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param gc A Gdk::GC, used for clipping.
    * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf.
    * @param src_x Source X coordinate within pixbuf.
@@ -609,7 +607,6 @@ public:
    * support can be turned off by setting the GDK_DISABLE_MEDIALIB environment
    * variable.
    *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf.
    * @param src_x Source X coordinate within pixbuf.
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinates within pixbuf.
@@ -757,8 +754,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the Gdk::Screen associated with a Gdk::Drawable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_screen() instead
    * 
@@ -771,8 +766,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the Gdk::Screen associated with a Gdk::Drawable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_screen() instead
    * 
@@ -785,8 +778,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Drawable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_display() instead
    * 
@@ -799,8 +790,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Drawable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use Gdk::Window::get_display() instead
    * 
@@ -813,8 +802,6 @@ public:
   /** Creates a Cairo context for drawing to @a drawable.
    * 
    * @return A newly created Cairo context.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}.
    */
   Cairo::RefPtr<Cairo::Context> create_cairo_context();
 

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/event.h

@@ -341,8 +341,6 @@ public:
    * have been allocated by GTK+, for instance, by
    * copy().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    */
   void set_screen(const Glib::RefPtr<Screen>& screen);
@@ -355,8 +353,6 @@ public:
    * to which <tt>event->motion.x_root</tt> and
    * <tt>event->motion.y_root</tt> are relative.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The screen for the event.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_screen();
@@ -369,8 +365,6 @@ public:
    * to which <tt>event->motion.x_root</tt> and
    * <tt>event->motion.y_root</tt> are relative.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The screen for the event.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Screen> get_screen() const;

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/gc.h

@@ -697,16 +697,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Screen for which @a gc was created
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Screen for @a gc.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_screen();
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Screen for which @a gc was created
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Screen for @a gc.
    */

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/general.h

@@ -44,8 +44,6 @@ namespace Cairo
  *
  * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr
  * reference.
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 void set_source_color(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Color& color);
 #endif
@@ -53,8 +51,6 @@ void set_source_color(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::C
 /** Sets the specified Gdk::Color as the source color of the Cairo context.
  * @param @context The cairo context.
  * @param color The color to use as the source color. 
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 void set_source_color(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Color& color);
 
@@ -67,8 +63,6 @@ void set_source_color(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const
  *
  * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr
  * reference.
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 void set_source_pixbuf(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf, double pixbuf_x = 0, double pixbuf_y = 0);
 #endif
@@ -78,8 +72,6 @@ void set_source_pixbuf(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib:
  * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf
  * @param pixbuf_x X coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixbuf.
  * @param pixbuf_y Y coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixbuf.
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 void set_source_pixbuf(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf, double pixbuf_x = 0, double pixbuf_y = 0);
 
@@ -92,8 +84,6 @@ void set_source_pixbuf(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const
  *
  * @deprecated Use the overloaded function that takes a const RefPtr
  * reference.
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 void set_source_pixmap(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixmap>& pixmap, double pixmap_x, double pixmap_y);
 #endif
@@ -103,8 +93,6 @@ void set_source_pixmap(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib:
  * @param pixmap A Gdk::Pixmap
  * @param pixmap_x X coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixmap.
  * @param pixmap_y Y coordinate of location to place upper left corner of pixmap.
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 void set_source_pixmap(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixmap>& pixmap, double pixmap_x, double pixmap_y);
 
@@ -116,8 +104,6 @@ void set_source_pixmap(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const
  *
  * @deprecated Use add_rectangle_to_path() instead
  * reference.
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 void rectangle(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangle& rectangle);
 #endif
@@ -126,8 +112,6 @@ void rectangle(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangl
  *
  * @param context A cairo context.
  * @param rectangle A rectangle to add to the path of the context. 
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 void add_rectangle_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Rectangle& rectangle);
 
@@ -138,8 +122,6 @@ void add_rectangle_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, c
  * @param region A region to add to the path of the context. 
  *
  * @deprecated Use add_region_to_path() instead
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 void region(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& region);
 #endif
@@ -148,8 +130,6 @@ void region(::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& reg
  *
  * @param context A cairo context.
  * @param region A region to add to the path of the context. 
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 void add_region_to_path(const ::Cairo::RefPtr< ::Cairo::Context >& context, const Gdk::Region& region);
 

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/image.h

@@ -202,8 +202,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Determines the type of a given image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -212,8 +210,6 @@ public:
   ImageType get_image_type() const;
   
   /** Determines the visual that was used to create the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -222,8 +218,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Visual> get_visual();
   
   /** Determines the visual that was used to create the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -232,8 +226,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<const Visual> get_visual() const;
   
   /** Determines the byte order of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -242,8 +234,6 @@ public:
   ByteOrder get_byte_order() const;
   
   /** Determines the width of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -252,8 +242,6 @@ public:
   int get_width() const;
   
   /** Determines the height of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -262,8 +250,6 @@ public:
   int get_height() const;
   
   /** Determines the depth of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -275,8 +261,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Determines the number of bytes per pixel of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -289,8 +273,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Determines the number of bytes per pixel of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -302,8 +284,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GDKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Determines the number of bytes per line of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -316,8 +296,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Determines the number of bytes per line of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -327,8 +305,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Determines the number of bits per pixel of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -338,8 +314,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns a pointer to the pixel data of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 
@@ -348,8 +322,6 @@ public:
   void* get_pixels();
   
   /** Returns a pointer to the pixel data of the image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Gdk::Image should not be used anymore.
    * 

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbuf.h

@@ -349,8 +349,6 @@ protected:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
    Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr<Drawable>& src, const Glib::RefPtr<Colormap>& cmap,
          int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -362,8 +360,6 @@ protected:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
    Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr<Drawable>& src,
          int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -384,8 +380,6 @@ protected:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr<Image>& src, const Glib::RefPtr<Colormap>& cmap,
          int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -397,8 +391,6 @@ protected:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newinp212
    */
   Pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr<Image>& src,
          int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -479,8 +471,6 @@ public:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   
   static Glib::RefPtr<Pixbuf> create(const Glib::RefPtr<Drawable>& src, const Glib::RefPtr<Colormap>& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -493,8 +483,6 @@ public:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within drawable.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   
   static Glib::RefPtr<Pixbuf> create(const Glib::RefPtr<Drawable>& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -508,8 +496,6 @@ public:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   
   static Glib::RefPtr<Pixbuf> create(const Glib::RefPtr<Image>& src, const Glib::RefPtr<Colormap>& cmap, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);
@@ -522,8 +508,6 @@ public:
    * @param src_y Source Y coordinate within the image.
    * @param width Width in pixels of region to get.
    * @param height Height in pixels of region to get.
-   *
-   * @newinp212
    */
   
   static Glib::RefPtr<Pixbuf> create(const Glib::RefPtr<Image>& src, int src_x, int src_y, int width, int height);

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/pixbufanimationiter.h

@@ -112,8 +112,6 @@ public:
    * conveniently takes a timeout in milliseconds, so you can use a timeout
    * to schedule the next update.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return Delay time in milliseconds (thousandths of a second).
    */
   int get_delay_time() const;
@@ -128,8 +126,6 @@ public:
    * advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it, with 
    * Gdk::Pixbuf::copy() as it may get recycled as you advance the iterator.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The pixbuf to be displayed.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_pixbuf();
@@ -143,8 +139,6 @@ public:
    * advance(). Copy the pixbuf to keep it, with 
    * Gdk::Pixbuf::copy() as it may get recycled as you advance the iterator.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The pixbuf to be displayed.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Pixbuf> get_pixbuf() const;
@@ -156,8 +150,6 @@ public:
    * you're on the currently loading frame, you need to redraw the screen for
    * the updated area.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the frame we're on is partially loaded, or the last frame.
    */
   bool on_currently_loading_frame() const;
@@ -183,8 +175,6 @@ public:
    * if <tt>true</tt>, you need to call get_pixbuf() and update the
    * display with the new pixbuf.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param current_time Current time.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the image may need updating.
    */
@@ -198,8 +188,6 @@ public:
    * if true, you need to call get_pixbuf() and update the
    * display with the new pixbuf.
    *
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   *
    * @return true if the image may need updating.
    */
   bool advance();

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/screen.h

@@ -116,16 +116,12 @@ protected:
 public:
   
   /** Gets the default colormap for @a screen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default Gdk::Colormap.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Colormap> get_default_colormap();
   
   /** Gets the default colormap for @a screen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default Gdk::Colormap.
    */
@@ -133,24 +129,18 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the default @a colormap for @a screen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param colormap A Gdk::Colormap.
    */
   void set_default_colormap(const Glib::RefPtr<const Colormap>& colormap);
   
   /** Gets the system's default colormap for @a screen
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default colormap for @a screen.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Colormap> get_system_colormap();
   
   /** Gets the system's default colormap for @a screen
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The default colormap for @a screen.
    */
@@ -161,8 +151,6 @@ public:
    * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
    * The return value should not be freed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The system visual.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Visual> get_system_visual();
@@ -171,8 +159,6 @@ public:
    * This is the visual for the root window of the display.
    * The return value should not be freed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The system visual.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Visual> get_system_visual() const;
@@ -184,8 +170,6 @@ public:
    * it can render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to
    * call this function.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_colormap()
    * 
    * @return The preferred colormap.
@@ -198,8 +182,6 @@ public:
    * it can render to any colormap and visual. So there's no need to
    * call this function.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_colormap()
    * 
    * @return The preferred colormap.
@@ -214,8 +196,6 @@ public:
    * the optimal one in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to 
    * drawables with any visual.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_visual()
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Visual chosen by GdkRGB.
@@ -229,8 +209,6 @@ public:
    * the optimal one in those previous versions. GdkRGB can now render to 
    * drawables with any visual.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_system_visual()
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Visual chosen by GdkRGB.
@@ -252,8 +230,6 @@ public:
    * For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
    * Gdk::Window::set_opacity().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A colormap to use for windows with
    * an alpha channel or <tt>0</tt> if the capability is not available.
    */
@@ -273,8 +249,6 @@ public:
    * For setting an overall opacity for a top-level window, see
    * Gdk::Window::set_opacity().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A colormap to use for windows with
    * an alpha channel or <tt>0</tt> if the capability is not available.
    */
@@ -285,8 +259,6 @@ public:
    * alpha channel. See the docs for get_rgba_colormap()
    * for caveats.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A visual to use for windows with an
    * alpha channel or <tt>0</tt> if the capability is not available.
    */
@@ -296,8 +268,6 @@ public:
    * alpha channel. See the docs for get_rgba_colormap()
    * for caveats.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return A visual to use for windows with an
    * alpha channel or <tt>0</tt> if the capability is not available.
    */
@@ -311,8 +281,6 @@ public:
    * On X11 this function returns whether a compositing manager is
    * compositing @a screen.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return Whether windows with RGBA visuals can reasonably be
    * expected to have their alpha channels drawn correctly on the screen.
    */
@@ -320,16 +288,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the root window of @a screen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The root window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_root_window();
   
   /** Gets the root window of @a screen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The root window.
    */
@@ -337,16 +301,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the display to which the @a screen belongs.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The display to which @a screen belongs.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Display> get_display();
   
   /** Gets the display to which the @a screen belongs.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The display to which @a screen belongs.
    */
@@ -356,23 +316,17 @@ public:
   /** Gets the index of @a screen among the screens in the display
    * to which it belongs. (See get_display())
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The index.
    */
   int get_number() const;
   
   /** Gets the width of @a screen in pixels
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The width of @a screen in pixels.
    */
   int get_width() const;
   
   /** Gets the height of @a screen in pixels
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The height of @a screen in pixels.
    */
@@ -381,8 +335,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the width of @a screen in millimeters. 
    * Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The width of @a screen in millimeters.
    */
   int get_width_mm() const;
@@ -390,8 +342,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the height of @a screen in millimeters. 
    * Note that on some X servers this value will not be correct.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The heigth of @a screen in millimeters.
    */
   int get_height_mm() const;
@@ -401,8 +351,6 @@ public:
    * A visual describes a hardware image data format.
    * For example, a visual might support 24-bit color, or 8-bit color,
    * and might expect pixels to be in a certain format.
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A list of visuals.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr<Visual> > list_visuals();
@@ -411,8 +359,6 @@ public:
   /** Obtains a list of all toplevel windows known to GDK on the screen @a screen.
    * A toplevel window is a child of the root window (see
    * gdk_get_default_root_window()).
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return List of toplevel windows.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr<Window> > get_toplevel_windows();
@@ -421,16 +367,12 @@ public:
   /** Determines the name to pass to Gdk::Display::open() to get
    * a Gdk::Display with this screen as the default screen.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return The name.
    */
   Glib::ustring make_display_name();
 
   
   /** Returns the number of monitors which @a screen consists of.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return Number of monitors which @a screen consists of.
    */
@@ -445,8 +387,6 @@ public:
    * If no primary monitor is configured by the user, the return value
    * will be 0, defaulting to the first monitor.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return An integer index for the primary monitor, or 0 if none is configured.
    */
   int get_primary_monitor() const;
@@ -457,16 +397,12 @@ public:
    * Note that the size of the entire screen area can be retrieved via
    * get_width() and get_height().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param monitor_num The monitor number, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen).
    * @param dest A Gdk::Rectangle to be filled with the monitor geometry.
    */
   void get_monitor_geometry(int monitor_num, Rectangle& dest) const;
   
   /** Returns the monitor number in which the point ( @a x, @a y) is located.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param x The x coordinate in the virtual screen.
    * @param y The y coordinate in the virtual screen.
@@ -478,8 +414,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the number of the monitor in which the largest area of the 
    * bounding rectangle of @a window resides.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @return The monitor number in which most of @a window is located,
    * or if @a window does not intersect any monitors, a monitor,
@@ -489,8 +423,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the width in millimeters of the specified monitor, if available.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen).
    * @return The width of the monitor, or -1 if not available.
@@ -498,8 +430,6 @@ public:
   int get_monitor_width_mm(int monitor_num) const;
   
   /** Gets the height in millimeters of the specified monitor.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen).
    * @return The height of the monitor, or -1 if not available.
@@ -510,8 +440,6 @@ public:
    * Usually something like VGA, DVI, or TV, not the actual
    * product name of the display device.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param monitor_num Number of the monitor, between 0 and gdk_screen_get_n_monitors (screen).
    * @return A newly-allocated string containing the name of the monitor,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if the name cannot be determined.
@@ -531,8 +459,6 @@ public:
    * GDK_WIN32_CLIENT_MESSAGE to all top-level windows. The amount of
    * data is limited to one long, i.e. four bytes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param event The Gdk::Event.
    */
   void broadcast_client_message(GdkEvent* event);
@@ -541,8 +467,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the default screen for the default display. (See
    * Gdk::Display::get_default()).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Screen, or <tt>0</tt> if there is no default display.
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_default();
@@ -557,8 +481,6 @@ public:
    * default set of font options does not affect contexts that
    * have already been created.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param options A #cairo_font_options_t, or <tt>0</tt> to unset any
    * previously set default font options.
    */
@@ -568,8 +490,6 @@ public:
    
 
   /** Gets any options previously set with set_font_options().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The current font options, or <tt>0</tt> if no default
    * font options have been set.
@@ -582,8 +502,6 @@ public:
    * and cairo units. The default value is 96, meaning that a 10 point
    * font will be 13 units high. (10 * 96. / 72. = 13.3).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param dpi The resolution in "dots per inch". (Physical inches aren't actually
    * involved; the terminology is conventional.).
    */
@@ -592,8 +510,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the resolution for font handling on the screen; see
    * set_resolution() for full details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The current resolution, or -1 if no resolution
    * has been set.
    */
@@ -614,8 +530,6 @@ public:
    * The returned window should be unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when
    * no longer needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The currently active window, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_active_window();
@@ -634,8 +548,6 @@ public:
    * The returned window should be unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when
    * no longer needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The currently active window, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_active_window() const;
@@ -656,8 +568,6 @@ public:
    * windows it contains, so it should be freed using Glib::list_free() and
    * its windows unrefed using Glib::object_unref() when no longer needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A list of Gdk::Window<!-- -->s for the current window stack,
    * or <tt>0</tt>.
    */

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/visual.h

@@ -225,16 +225,12 @@ public:
 
    
   /** Gets the screen to which this visual belongs
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The screen to which this visual belongs.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Screen> get_screen();
    
   /** Gets the screen to which this visual belongs
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The screen to which this visual belongs.
    */
@@ -242,40 +238,30 @@ public:
    
    
   /** Returns the type of visual this is (PseudoColor, TrueColor, etc).
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::VisualType stating the type of @a visual.
    */
   VisualType get_visual_type() const;
    
   /** Returns the bit depth of this visual.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return The bit depth of this visual.
    */
   int get_depth() const;
    
   /** Returns the byte order of this visual.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::ByteOrder stating the byte order of @a visual.
    */
   ByteOrder get_byte_order();
    
   /** Returns the size of a colormap for this visual.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return The size of a colormap that is suitable for @a visual.
    */
   int get_colormap_size() const;
    
   /** Returns the number of significant bits per red, green and blue value.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return The number of significant bits per color value for @a visual.
    */
@@ -287,8 +273,6 @@ public:
    * to be in position (according to the "mask").  Finally, "precision" refers
    * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param shift A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param precision A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
@@ -301,8 +285,6 @@ public:
    * to be in position (according to the "mask").  Finally, "precision" refers
    * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param shift A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param precision A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
@@ -315,8 +297,6 @@ public:
    * to be in position (according to the "mask").  Finally, "precision" refers
    * to how much precision the pixel value contains for a particular primary.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param mask A pointer to a #guint32 to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param shift A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param precision A pointer to a <tt>int</tt> to be filled in, or <tt>0</tt>.

libs/tk/ydkmm/ydkmm/gdkmm/window.h

@@ -771,16 +771,12 @@ public:
   
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Visual describing the pixel format of @a window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Visual.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Visual> get_visual();
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Visual describing the pixel format of @a window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Visual.
    */
@@ -801,16 +797,12 @@ public:
   
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Display> get_display();
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with a Gdk::Window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a window.
    */
@@ -962,8 +954,6 @@ public:
    * request to move the window in the Z-order, restack() only
    * requests the restack, does not guarantee it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param sibling A Gdk::Window that is a sibling of @a window, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param above A boolean.
    */
@@ -977,8 +967,6 @@ public:
    * requests the restack but does not guarantee it.
    *
    * @param above Whether to raise or lower the window.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,18}
    */
   void restack(bool above);
 
@@ -1054,8 +1042,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Child windows are not moved.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param region The Gdk::Region to move.
    * @param dx Amount to move in the X direction.
    * @param dy Amount to move in the Y direction.
@@ -1069,8 +1055,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Some backends may not support native child windows.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the window has a native window, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool ensure_native();
@@ -1133,8 +1117,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See set_composited().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the window is composited.
    */
   bool get_composited() const;
@@ -1163,8 +1145,6 @@ public:
    * setting a window as composited is supported before
    * attempting to do so.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param composited <tt>true</tt> to set the window as composited.
    */
   void set_composited(bool composited =  TRUE);
@@ -1198,8 +1178,6 @@ public:
    * On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
    * function does nothing.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param mask Shape mask, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param x X position of shape mask with respect to @a window.
    * @param y Y position of shape mask with respect to @a window.
@@ -1223,8 +1201,6 @@ public:
    * On the Win32 platform, this functionality is not present and the
    * function does nothing.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param shape_region Region of window to be non-transparent.
    * @param offset_x X position of @a shape_region in @a window coordinates.
    * @param offset_y Y position of @a shape_region in @a window coordinates.
@@ -1235,8 +1211,6 @@ public:
    * for all children of @a window, ignoring the input shape mask of @a window
    * itself. Contrast with merge_child_input_shapes() which includes
    * the input shape mask of @a window in the masks to be merged.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void set_child_input_shapes();
   
@@ -1248,8 +1222,6 @@ public:
    * This function is distinct from set_child_input_shapes()
    * because it includes @a window's input shape mask in the set of
    * shapes to be merged.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void merge_child_input_shapes();
 
@@ -1271,16 +1243,12 @@ public:
   bool is_viewable() const;
   
   /** Determines whether or not the window is an input only window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a window is input only.
    */
   bool is_input_only() const;
   
   /** Determines whether or not the window is shaped.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a window is shaped.
    */
@@ -1306,8 +1274,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether the window has a native window or not. Note that
    * you can use ensure_native() if a native window is needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the %window has a native window, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool has_native() const;
@@ -1324,8 +1290,6 @@ public:
   void set_type_hint(WindowTypeHint hint);
   
   /** This function returns the type hint set for a window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The type hint set for @a window.
    */
@@ -1334,8 +1298,6 @@ public:
   /** Determines whether or not the window manager is hinted that @a window
    * has modal behaviour.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return Whether or not the window has the modal hint set.
    */
   bool get_modal_hint() const;
@@ -1473,8 +1435,6 @@ public:
    * be needed if you for instance mix direct native drawing with
    * gdk drawing. For Gtk widgets that don't use double buffering this
    * will be called automatically before sending the expose event.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    */
   void flush();
   
@@ -1508,8 +1468,6 @@ public:
   /** When using GTK+, typically you should use gtk_window_set_startup_id()
    * instead of this low-level function.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param startup_id A string with startup-notification identifier.
    */
   void set_startup_id(const Glib::ustring& startup_id);
@@ -1564,7 +1522,6 @@ public:
    * the display.
    *
    * @see set_back_pixmap().
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   void unset_back_pixmap();
 
@@ -1573,8 +1530,6 @@ public:
    * does not have its own background and reuses the parent's, <tt>0</tt> is
    * returned and you'll have to query it yourself.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return The pattern to use for the background or
    * <tt>0</tt> to use the parent's background.
    */
@@ -1585,8 +1540,6 @@ public:
    * does not have its own background and reuses the parent's, <tt>0</tt> is
    * returned and you'll have to query it yourself.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return The pattern to use for the background or
    * <tt>0</tt> to use the parent's background.
    */
@@ -1656,8 +1609,6 @@ public:
    * most-recently-processed configure event, rather than the current
    * size on the X server.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @return The width of @a window.
    */
   int get_width() const;
@@ -1668,8 +1619,6 @@ public:
    * most-recently-processed configure event, rather than the current
    * size on the X server.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @return The height of @a window.
    */
   int get_height() const;
@@ -1703,8 +1652,6 @@ public:
    * get_origin() but allows you go pass
    * in any position in the window, not just the origin.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param x X coordinate in window.
    * @param y Y coordinate in window.
    * @param root_x Return location for X coordinate.
@@ -1729,8 +1676,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: coords_from_parent()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param x X coordinate in child's coordinate system.
    * @param y Y coordinate in child's coordinate system.
    * @param parent_x Return location for X coordinate
@@ -1757,8 +1702,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: coords_to_parent()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param parent_x X coordinate in parent's coordinate system.
    * @param parent_y Y coordinate in parent's coordinate system.
    * @param x Return location for X coordinate in child's coordinate system.
@@ -1869,8 +1812,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return Effective parent of @a window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_effective_parent();
@@ -1881,8 +1822,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return Effective parent of @a window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Window> get_effective_parent() const;
@@ -1894,8 +1833,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: gdk_offscreen_window_get_embedder()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return The effective toplevel window containing @a window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_effective_toplevel();
@@ -2002,16 +1939,12 @@ public:
   void set_group(const Glib::RefPtr<Window>& leader);
   
   /** Returns the group leader window for @a window. See set_group().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The group leader window for @a window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_group();
   
   /** Returns the group leader window for @a window. See set_group().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The group leader window for @a window.
    */
@@ -2086,8 +2019,6 @@ public:
    * Initially the surface contents are all 0 (transparent if contents
    * have transparency, black otherwise.)
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param content The content for the new surface.
    * @param width Width of the new surface.
    * @param height Height of the new surface.
@@ -2105,8 +2036,6 @@ public:
   /** Emits a short beep associated to @a window in the appropriate
    * display, if supported. Otherwise, emits a short beep on
    * the display just as Gdk::Display::beep().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   void beep();
 
@@ -2208,8 +2137,6 @@ public:
    * @param window The source window for this drag.
    * @param targets A list of the offered targets names.
    * @return A newly created Gdk::DragContext.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<DragContext> drag_begin(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& targets);
   
@@ -2345,8 +2272,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * On X, calling this function makes @a window participate in the
    * _NET_WM_SYNC_REQUEST window manager protocol.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void enable_synchronized_configure();
   
@@ -2358,8 +2283,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function can only be called if enable_synchronized_configure()
    * was called previously.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void configure_finished();
 
@@ -2371,8 +2294,6 @@ public:
    * instead you should allow the window to be treated according to 
    * standard policy for its semantic type.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param skips_taskbar <tt>true</tt> to skip the taskbar.
    */
   void set_skip_taskbar_hint(bool skips_taskbar =  true);
@@ -2386,8 +2307,6 @@ public:
    * allow the window to be treated according to standard policy for 
    * its semantic type.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param skips_pager <tt>true</tt> to skip the pager.
    */
   void set_skip_pager_hint(bool skips_pager =  true);
@@ -2396,8 +2315,6 @@ public:
   /** Toggles whether a window needs the user's
    * urgent attention.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param urgent <tt>true</tt> if the window is urgent.
    */
   void set_urgency_hint(bool urgent =  true);
@@ -2416,8 +2333,6 @@ public:
    * fullscreenification actually happening. But it will happen with
    * most standard window managers, and GDK makes a best effort to get
    * it to happen.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    */
   void fullscreen();
   
@@ -2431,8 +2346,6 @@ public:
    * unfullscreenification actually happening. But it will happen with
    * most standard window managers, and GDK makes a best effort to get
    * it to happen. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    */
   void unfullscreen();
 
@@ -2490,8 +2403,6 @@ public:
    * But it will happen with most standard window managers,
    * and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param setting Whether to keep @a window above other windows.
    */
   void set_keep_above(bool setting =  true);
@@ -2506,8 +2417,6 @@ public:
    * But it will happen with most standard window managers,
    * and GDK makes a best effort to get it to happen.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param setting Whether to keep @a window below other windows.
    */
   void set_keep_below(bool setting =  true);
@@ -2524,8 +2433,6 @@ public:
    * For making non-toplevel windows translucent, see 
    * set_composited().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param opacity Opacity.
    */
   void set_opacity(double opacity);
@@ -2534,8 +2441,6 @@ public:
   /** Determines whether or not the desktop environment shuld be hinted that
    * the window does not want to receive input focus.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return Whether or not the window should receive input focus.
    */
   bool get_accept_focus() const;
@@ -2546,8 +2451,6 @@ public:
    * On X, it is the responsibility of the window manager to interpret this 
    * hint. ICCCM-compliant window manager usually respect it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param accept_focus <tt>true</tt> if the window should receive input focus.
    */
   void set_accept_focus(bool accept_focus =  true);
@@ -2556,8 +2459,6 @@ public:
   /** Determines whether or not the desktop environment should be hinted that the
    * window does not want to receive input focus when it is mapped.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return Whether or not the window wants to receive input focus when
    * it is mapped.
    */
@@ -2572,8 +2473,6 @@ public:
    * this hint. %Window managers following the freedesktop.org window
    * manager extension specification should respect it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param focus_on_map <tt>true</tt> if the window should receive input focus when mapped.
    */
   void set_focus_on_map(bool focus_on_map);
@@ -2591,8 +2490,6 @@ public:
    * If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to
    * add a reference to it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @return The offscreen pixmap, or <tt>0</tt> if not offscreen.
    */
@@ -2602,8 +2499,6 @@ public:
    * If you need to keep this around over window resizes, you need to
    * add a reference to it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @return The offscreen pixmap, or <tt>0</tt> if not offscreen.
    */
@@ -2611,8 +2506,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the window that @a window is embedded in.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @return The embedding Gdk::Window, or <tt>0</tt> if @a window is not an
@@ -2621,8 +2514,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Window> get_offscreen_embedder();
   
   /** Gets the window that @a window is embedded in.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @return The embedding Gdk::Window, or <tt>0</tt> if @a window is not an
@@ -2638,8 +2529,6 @@ public:
    * signal on the @a embedder and the Gdk::Window::signal_to_embedder() and
    * Gdk::Window::signal_from_embedder() signals on @a window.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param window A Gdk::Window.
    * @param embedder The Gdk::Window that @a window gets embedded in.
    */
@@ -2658,8 +2547,6 @@ public:
    * Redirection is active until remove_redirection()
    * is called.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param drawable A Gdk::Drawable.
    * @param src_x X position in @a window.
    * @param src_y Y position in @a window.
@@ -2672,8 +2559,6 @@ public:
   
   /** Removes any active redirection started by
    * redirect_to_drawable().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   void remove_redirection();
 
@@ -2681,8 +2566,6 @@ public:
   /** This function informs GDK that the geometry of an embedded
    * offscreen window has changed. This is necessary for GDK to keep
    * track of which offscreen window the pointer is in.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    */
   void geometry_changed();
   

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/aboutdialog.h

@@ -122,8 +122,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.12: Use get_program_name() instead.
    * 
@@ -139,8 +137,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
    * If this is not set, it defaults to Glib::get_application_name().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.12: Use set_program_name() instead.
    * 
    * @param name The program name.
@@ -152,24 +148,18 @@ public:
   /** Return value: The program name.
    * 
    * @return The program name.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_program_name() const;
   
   /** Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
    * If this is not set, it defaults to Glib::get_application_name().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param name The program name.
    */
   void set_program_name(const Glib::ustring& name);
 
   
   /** Returns the version string.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The version string. The string is owned by the about
    * dialog and must not be modified.
@@ -177,16 +167,12 @@ public:
   Glib::ustring get_version() const;
   
   /** Sets the version string to display in the about dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param version The version string.
    */
   void set_version(const Glib::ustring& version);
   
   /** Returns the copyright string.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
    * dialog and must not be modified.
@@ -196,15 +182,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
    * This should be a short string of one or two lines.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param copyright (allow-none) the copyright string.
    */
   void set_copyright(const Glib::ustring& copyright);
   
   /** Returns the comments string.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The comments. The string is owned by the about
    * dialog and must not be modified.
@@ -214,15 +196,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the comments string to display in the about dialog.
    * This should be a short string of one or two lines.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param comments A comments string.
    */
   void set_comments(const Glib::ustring& comments);
   
   /** Returns the license information.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The license information. The string is owned by the about
    * dialog and must not be modified.
@@ -233,15 +211,11 @@ public:
    * license dialog. If @a license is <tt>0</tt>, the license button is
    * hidden.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param license The license information or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_license(const Glib::ustring& license);
   
   /** Returns the website URL.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The website URL. The string is owned by the about
    * dialog and must not be modified.
@@ -253,8 +227,6 @@ public:
    * Note that that the hook functions need to be set up
    * before calling this function.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param website A URL string starting with "http://".
    */
   void set_website(const Glib::ustring& website);
@@ -262,16 +234,12 @@ public:
   /** Return value: The label used for the website link.
    * 
    * @return The label used for the website link. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_website_label() const;
   
   /** Sets the label to be used for the website link.
    * It defaults to the website URL.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param website_label The label used for the website link.
    */
   void set_website_label(const Glib::ustring& website_label);
@@ -280,8 +248,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab
    * of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A <tt>0</tt>-terminated string array containing
    * the authors. The array is owned by the about dialog
    * and must not be modified.
@@ -292,8 +258,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
    * of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param authors A <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings.
    */
   void set_authors(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& authors) const;
@@ -302,8 +266,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the string which are displayed in the documenters
    * tab of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A <tt>0</tt>-terminated string array containing
    * the documenters. The array is owned by the about dialog
    * and must not be modified.
@@ -314,8 +276,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the documenters tab
    * of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param documenters A <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings.
    */
   void set_documenters(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& documenters);
@@ -323,8 +283,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
    * of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A <tt>0</tt>-terminated string array containing
    * the artists. The array is owned by the about dialog
    * and must not be modified.
@@ -334,8 +292,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
    * of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param artists A <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings.
    */
   void set_artists(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& artists);
@@ -343,8 +299,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the translator credits string which is displayed
    * in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The translator credits string. The string is
    * owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
    */
@@ -364,16 +318,12 @@ public:
    * since Gtk::AboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
    * and hide the tab.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param translator_credits The translator credits.
    */
   void set_translator_credits(const Glib::ustring& translator_credits);
 
   
   /** Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The pixbuf displayed as logo. The
    * pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a
@@ -382,8 +332,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_logo();
   
   /** Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The pixbuf displayed as logo. The
    * pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a
@@ -396,16 +344,12 @@ public:
    * If it is <tt>0</tt>, the default window icon set with
    * Gtk::Window::set_default_icon() will be used.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param logo A Gdk::Pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_logo(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& logo);
 
   
   /** Returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The icon name displayed as logo. The string is
    * owned by the dialog. If you want to keep a reference
@@ -417,8 +361,6 @@ public:
    * If it is <tt>0</tt>, the default window icon set with
    * Gtk::Window::set_default_icon() will be used.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param icon_name An icon name, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_logo_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& icon_name);
@@ -427,8 +369,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the license text in @a about is
    * automatically wrapped.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the license text is wrapped.
    */
   bool get_wrap_license() const;
@@ -436,8 +376,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the license text in @a about is
    * automatically wrapped.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param wrap_license Whether to wrap the license.
    */
   void set_wrap_license(bool wrap_license);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelgroup.h

@@ -125,8 +125,6 @@ public:
   /** Locks are added and removed using lock() and
    * unlock().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if there are 1 or more locks on the @a accel_group,
    * <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -135,8 +133,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets a Gdk::ModifierType representing the mask for this
    *  @a accel_group. For example, Gdk::CONTROL_MASK, Gdk::SHIFT_MASK, etc.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The modifier mask for this accel group.
    */
   Gdk::ModifierType get_modifier_mask() const;
@@ -193,8 +189,6 @@ public:
   /** Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string 
    * which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param accelerator_key Accelerator keyval.
    * @param accelerator_mods Accelerator modifier mask.
    * @return A newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/accelmap.h

@@ -107,8 +107,6 @@ void save(const std::string& filename);
  * have to be unlocked.
  *
  * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
- *
- * @newin{2,4}
  */
 void lock_path(const std::string& accel_path);
 
@@ -116,16 +114,12 @@ void lock_path(const std::string& accel_path);
  * about accelerator path locking.
  *
  * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
- *
- * @newin{2,4}
  */
 void unlock_path(const std::string& accel_path);
 
 /** Looks up the accelerator entry for accel_path.
  * @param accel_path A valid accelerator path.
  * @result true if accel_path is known, false otherwise
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path);
 
@@ -133,8 +127,6 @@ bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path);
  * @param accel_path A valid accelerator path.
  * @param key The accelerator key to be filled in.
  * @result true if accel_path is known, false otherwise
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 bool lookup_entry (const Glib::ustring& accel_path, Gtk::AccelKey& key);
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/action.h

@@ -209,8 +209,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the name of the action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not
    * be freed.
@@ -219,8 +217,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the action and its associated action group 
    * are both sensitive.
@@ -231,8 +227,6 @@ public:
    * necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See is_sensitive() 
    * for that.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the action itself is sensitive.
    */
   bool get_sensitive() const;
@@ -243,16 +237,12 @@ public:
    * is_sensitive() 
    * for that.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param sensitive <tt>true</tt> to make the action sensitive.
    */
   void set_sensitive(bool sensitive =  true);
 
   
   /** Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the action and its associated action group 
    * are both visible.
@@ -263,8 +253,6 @@ public:
    * necessarily mean effective visibility. See is_sensitive() 
    * for that.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the action itself is visible.
    */
   bool get_visible() const;
@@ -274,8 +262,6 @@ public:
    * is_visible() 
    * for that.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param visible <tt>true</tt> to make the action visible.
    */
   void set_visible(bool visible =  true);
@@ -286,32 +272,24 @@ public:
    * activated.
    * 
    * It can also be used to manually activate an action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void activate();
   
   /** This function is intended for use by action implementations to
    * create icons displayed in the proxy widgets.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param icon_size The size of the icon that should be created.
    * @return A widget that displays the icon for this action.
    */
   Image* create_icon(IconSize icon_size);
   
   /** Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return A menu item connected to the action.
    */
   MenuItem* create_menu_item();
   
   /** Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return A toolbar item connected to the action.
    */
@@ -321,8 +299,6 @@ public:
    * item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an
    * instance of that menu.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The menu item provided by the
    * action, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -338,8 +314,6 @@ public:
    * If the widget is already connected to an action, it is disconnected
    * first.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::set_related_action() instead.
    * 
    * @param proxy The proxy widget.
@@ -349,8 +323,6 @@ public:
   /** Disconnects a proxy widget from an action.  
    * Does <em>not</em> destroy the widget, however.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Activatable::set_related_action() instead.
    * 
    * @param proxy The proxy widget.
@@ -361,8 +333,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
    * See also Gtk::Widget::get_action().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A SList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
    * and must not be modified.
    */
@@ -371,8 +341,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
    * See also Gtk::Widget::get_action().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A SList of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+
    * and must not be modified.
    */
@@ -387,21 +355,15 @@ public:
    * of the accelerator, the @a action counts the number of times this
    * function has been called and doesn't remove the accelerator until
    * disconnect_accelerator() has been called as many times.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void connect_accelerator();
   
   /** Undoes the effect of one call to connect_accelerator().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void disconnect_accelerator();
 
   
   /** Returns the accel path for this action.  
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The accel path for this action, or <tt>0</tt>
    * if none is set. The returned string is owned by GTK+ 
@@ -433,8 +395,6 @@ public:
    * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with 
    * Glib::intern_static_string().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param accel_path The accelerator path.
    */
   void set_accel_path(const Glib::ustring& accel_path);
@@ -442,144 +402,108 @@ public:
   /** Sets the Gtk::AccelGroup in which the accelerator for this action
    * will be installed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param accel_group A Gtk::AccelGroup or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_accel_group(const Glib::RefPtr<AccelGroup>& accel_group);
 
   
   /** Sets the label of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param label The label text to set.
    */
   void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label);
   
   /** Gets the label text of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The label text.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_label() const;
   
   /** Sets a shorter label text on @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param short_label The label text to set.
    */
   void set_short_label(const Glib::ustring& short_label);
   
   /** Gets the short label text of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The short label text.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_short_label() const;
   
   /** Sets the tooltip text on @a action
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param tooltip The tooltip text.
    */
   void set_tooltip(const Glib::ustring& tooltip);
   
   /** Gets the tooltip text of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The tooltip text.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_tooltip() const;
   
   /** Sets the stock id on @a action
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param stock_id The stock id.
    */
   void set_stock_id(const StockID& stock_id);
   
   /** Gets the stock id of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The stock id.
    */
   StockID get_stock_id() const;
   
   /** Sets the icon of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon The Icon to set.
    */
   void set_gicon(const Glib::RefPtr<Gio::Icon>& icon);
   
   /** Gets the gicon of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The action's Icon if one is set.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gio::Icon> get_gicon();
   
   /** Gets the gicon of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The action's Icon if one is set.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gio::Icon> get_gicon() const;
   
   /** Sets the icon name on @a action
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon_name The icon name to set.
    */
   void set_icon_name(const Glib::ustring& icon_name);
   
   /** Gets the icon name of @a action.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The icon name.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_icon_name() const;
   
   /** Sets whether @a action is visible when horizontal
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param visible_horizontal Whether the action is visible horizontally.
    */
   void set_visible_horizontal(bool visible_horizontal =  true);
   
   /** Checks whether @a action is visible when horizontal
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return Whether @a action is visible when horizontal.
    */
   bool get_visible_horizontal() const;
   
   /** Sets whether @a action is visible when vertical 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param visible_vertical Whether the action is visible vertically.
    */
   void set_visible_vertical(bool visible_vertical =  true);
   
   /** Checks whether @a action is visible when horizontal
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return Whether @a action is visible when horizontal.
    */
@@ -589,15 +513,11 @@ public:
    * primarily by toolbar items to decide whether to show a label
    * or not.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param is_important <tt>true</tt> to make the action important.
    */
   void set_is_important(bool is_important =  true);
   
   /** Checks whether @a action is important or not
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return Whether @a action is important.
    */
@@ -610,8 +530,6 @@ public:
    * Use this if the menu item would be useless or hard to use
    * without their image.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param always_show <tt>true</tt> if menuitem proxies should always show their image.
    */
   void set_always_show_image(bool always_show =  true);
@@ -620,8 +538,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::Settings::property_gtk_menu_images() setting and always show their image,
    * if available.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the menu item proxies will always show their image.
    */
   bool get_always_show_image() const;
@@ -633,14 +549,10 @@ public:
    * Gtk::Activatable widget could result in calling activate(),
    * this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
    * cases (updating toggle state for instance).
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void block_activate();
   
   /** Reenable activation signals from the action 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unblock_activate();
 
@@ -876,8 +788,6 @@ protected:
    * 
    * This function is intended for use by action implementations.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
    * action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
    * 
@@ -891,8 +801,6 @@ protected:
    * 
    * This function is intended for use by action implementations.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: activatables are now responsible for activating the
    * action directly so this doesnt apply anymore.
    * 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/actiongroup.h

@@ -106,8 +106,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the name of the action group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The name of the action group.
    */
@@ -119,15 +117,11 @@ public:
    * they are sensitive (see get_sensitive()) and their group
    * is sensitive.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the group is sensitive.
    */
   bool get_sensitive() const;
   
   /** Changes the sensitivity of @a action_group
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param sensitive New sensitivity.
    */
@@ -138,15 +132,11 @@ public:
    * they are visible (see get_visible()) and their group
    * is visible.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the group is visible.
    */
   bool get_visible() const;
   
   /** Changes the visible of @a action_group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param visible New visiblity.
    */
@@ -154,8 +144,6 @@ public:
                                       
   
   /** Looks up an action in the action group by name.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param action_name The name of the action.
    * @return The action, or <tt>0</tt> if no action by that name exists.
@@ -163,8 +151,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Action> get_action(const Glib::ustring& action_name);
   
   /** Looks up an action in the action group by name.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param action_name The name of the action.
    * @return The action, or <tt>0</tt> if no action by that name exists.
@@ -173,16 +159,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Lists the actions in the action group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return An allocated list of the action objects in the action group.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle< Glib::RefPtr<Action> > get_actions();
   
   /** Lists the actions in the action group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return An allocated list of the action objects in the action group.
    */
@@ -204,8 +186,6 @@ public:
   void add(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action, const AccelKey& accel_key, const Action::SlotActivate& slot);
   
   /** Removes an action object from the action group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param action An action.
    */
@@ -216,8 +196,6 @@ public:
   /** Translates a string using the specified translate_func(). This
    * is mainly intended for language bindings.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param string A string.
    * @return The translation of @a string.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/activatable.h

@@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ namespace Gtk
 /** Activatable widgets can be connected to a Gtk::Action and reflect the state 
  * of the action. An Activatable can also provide feedback through its action, 
  * as it is responsible for activating the related action.
- *
- * @newin{2,16}
  */
 
 class Activatable : public Glib::Interface
@@ -143,23 +141,17 @@ public:
    * copy of the Gtk::Action property, since this function uses 
    * gtk_activatable_get_action() to retrieve the previous action</note>
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param action The Gtk::Action to set.
    */
   void do_set_related_action(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action);
   
   /** Gets the related Gtk::Action for @a activatable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The related Gtk::Action if one is set.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Action> get_related_action();
   
   /** Gets the related Gtk::Action for @a activatable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The related Gtk::Action if one is set.
    */
@@ -169,8 +161,6 @@ public:
    * and appearance when setting the related action or when
    * the action changes appearance.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return Whether @a activatable uses its actions appearance.
    */
   bool get_use_action_appearance() const;
@@ -180,8 +170,6 @@ public:
    * or unset and by the implementing class when
    * Gtk::Activatable::signal_use_action_appearance() changes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param action The related Gtk::Action or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void sync_action_properties(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action);
@@ -191,8 +179,6 @@ public:
    * <note>Gtk::Activatable implementors need to handle the Gtk::Activatable::property_related_action()
    * property and call do_set_related_action() when it changes.</note>
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param action The Gtk::Action to set.
    */
   void set_related_action(const Glib::RefPtr<Action>& action);
@@ -205,8 +191,6 @@ public:
    * sync_action_properties() to update @a activatable
    * if needed.</note>
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param use_appearance Whether to use the actions appearance.
    */
   void set_use_action_appearance(bool use_appearance =  true);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/adjustment.h

@@ -179,15 +179,11 @@ public:
    * to change, or using configure() has the same effect
    * of compressing "changed" emissions.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param lower The new minimum value.
    */
   void set_lower(double lower);
   
   /** Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The current minimum value of the adjustment.
    */
@@ -204,15 +200,11 @@ public:
    * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
    * properties.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param upper The new maximum value.
    */
   void set_upper(double upper);
   
   /** Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The current maximum value of the adjustment.
    */
@@ -225,15 +217,11 @@ public:
    * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
    * properties.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param step_increment The new step increment.
    */
   void set_step_increment(double step_increment);
   
   /** Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The current step increment of the adjustment.
    */
@@ -246,15 +234,11 @@ public:
    * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
    * properties.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param page_increment The new page increment.
    */
   void set_page_increment(double page_increment);
   
   /** Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The current page increment of the adjustment.
    */
@@ -267,15 +251,11 @@ public:
    * emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
    * properties.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param page_size The new page size.
    */
   void set_page_size(double page_size);
   
   /** Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The current page size of the adjustment.
    */
@@ -288,8 +268,6 @@ public:
    * signal. See set_lower() for an alternative way
    * of compressing multiple emissions of "changed" into one.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param value The new value.
    * @param lower The new minimum value.
    * @param upper The new maximum value.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/alignment.h

@@ -157,8 +157,6 @@ public:
    * this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
    * padding on the left.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param padding_top The padding at the top of the widget.
    * @param padding_bottom The padding at the bottom of the widget.
    * @param padding_left The padding at the left of the widget.
@@ -169,8 +167,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
    * See set_padding().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param padding_top Location to store the padding for the top of the widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param padding_bottom Location to store the padding for the bottom of the widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param padding_left Location to store the padding for the left of the widget, or <tt>0</tt>.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/assistant.h

@@ -85,8 +85,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * A Gtk::Assistant is a widget used to represent a generally complex 
  * operation split into several steps, guiding the user through its
  * pages and controlling the page flow to collect the necessary data.
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  * @ingroup Dialogs
  */
 
@@ -158,8 +156,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the page number of the current page
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The index (starting from 0) of the current page in
    * the @a assistant, if the @a assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned.
@@ -170,8 +166,6 @@ public:
    * in custom buttons, as the @a assistant flow can be set with
    * set_forward_page_func().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page_num Index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
    * If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
    * than the number of pages in the @a assistant, nothing
@@ -180,16 +174,12 @@ public:
   void set_current_page(int page_num);
   
   /** Returns the number of pages in the @a assistant
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The number of pages in the @a assistant.
    */
   int get_n_pages() const;
   
   /** Returns the child widget contained in page number @a page_num.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page_num The index of a page in the @a assistant, or -1 to get the last page;.
    * @return The child widget, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -198,8 +188,6 @@ public:
   Widget* get_nth_page(int page_num);
   
   /** Returns the child widget contained in page number @a page_num.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page_num The index of a page in the @a assistant, or -1 to get the last page;.
    * @return The child widget, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -208,8 +196,6 @@ public:
   const Widget* get_nth_page(int page_num) const;
   
   /** Prepends a page to the @a assistant.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A Gtk::Widget.
    * @return The index (starting at 0) of the inserted page.
@@ -217,8 +203,6 @@ public:
   int prepend_page(Widget& page);
   
   /** Appends a page to the @a assistant.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A Gtk::Widget.
    * @return The index (starting at 0) of the inserted page.
@@ -226,8 +210,6 @@ public:
   int append_page(Widget& page);
   
   /** Inserts a page in the @a assistant at a given position.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A Gtk::Widget.
    * @param position The index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
@@ -244,16 +226,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets the page type for @a page. The page type determines the page
    * behavior in the @a assistant.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @param type The new type for @a page.
    */
   void set_page_type(const Widget& page, AssistantPageType type);
   
   /** Gets the page type of @a page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The page type of @a page.
@@ -263,16 +241,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets a title for @a page. The title is displayed in the header
    * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @param title The new title for @a page.
    */
   void set_page_title(const Widget& page, const Glib::ustring& title);
   
   /** Gets the title for @a page. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The title for @a page.
@@ -282,16 +256,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets a header image for @a page. This image is displayed in the header
    * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @param pixbuf The new header image @a page.
    */
   void set_page_header_image(const Widget& page, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf);
   
   /** Gets the header image for @a page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The header image for @a page, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -300,8 +270,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_page_header_image(const Widget& page);
   
   /** Gets the header image for @a page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The header image for @a page, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -312,16 +280,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets a header image for @a page. This image is displayed in the side
    * area of the assistant when @a page is the current page.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @param pixbuf The new header image @a page.
    */
   void set_page_side_image(const Widget& page, const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf);
   
   /** Gets the header image for @a page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The side image for @a page, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -330,8 +294,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_page_side_image(const Widget& page);
   
   /** Gets the header image for @a page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return The side image for @a page, or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -342,16 +304,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether @a page contents are complete. This will make
    *  @a assistant update the buttons state to be able to continue the task.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @param complete The completeness status of the page.
    */
   void set_page_complete(const Widget& page, bool complete =  true);
   
   /** Gets whether @a page is complete.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param page A page of @a assistant.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a page is complete.
@@ -359,16 +317,12 @@ public:
   bool get_page_complete(const Widget& page) const;
   
   /** Adds a widget to the action area of a Gtk::Assistant.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param child A Gtk::Widget.
    */
   void add_action_widget(Widget& child);
   
   /** Removes a widget from the action area of a Gtk::Assistant.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param child A Gtk::Widget.
    */
@@ -383,8 +337,6 @@ public:
    * One situation where it can be necessary to call this
    * function is when changing a value on the current page
    * affects the future page flow of the assistant.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void update_buttons_state();
   
@@ -397,8 +349,6 @@ public:
    * or undone.  For example, showing a progress page to track
    * a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has
    * clicked apply on a confirmation page.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    */
   void commit();
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/builder.h

@@ -104,8 +104,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * When one of these objects is created, the XML file is read, and the interface 
  * is created. The Gtk::Builder object then provides an interface for accessing the 
  * widgets in the interface by the names assigned to them inside the UI description.
- *
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 
 class Builder : public Glib::Object
@@ -174,8 +172,6 @@ public:
    * @param filename the name of the file to parse.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_file(const std::string& filename);
 
@@ -189,8 +185,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_id The object to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::ustring& object_id);
   //This is just to avoid the ambiguous call when using a string literal, 
@@ -205,8 +199,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_id The object to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const char* object_id);
   /** Parses a file containing a GtkBuilder UI definition, building only the requested objects.
@@ -219,8 +211,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_ids The objects to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::FileError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids);
 
@@ -229,8 +219,6 @@ public:
    * @param buffer: the string to parse
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer);
   //This is just to avoid the ambiguous call when using a string literal, 
@@ -241,8 +229,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_id The object to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const char* object_id);
 
@@ -252,8 +238,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_id The object to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::ustring& object_id);
 
@@ -267,8 +251,6 @@ public:
    * @param object_ids The objects to build.
    * @result A new Builder object, or a null pointer if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<Builder> create_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids);
   
@@ -279,8 +261,6 @@ public:
    * @param buffer The file to parse.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename);
 
@@ -298,8 +278,6 @@ public:
    * @param The object to build.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename, const char* object_id);
 
@@ -315,8 +293,6 @@ public:
    * @param The object to build.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   bool add_from_file(const std::string& filename, const Glib::ustring& object_id);
 
@@ -335,8 +311,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::TreeModel), you have to explicitely list all of them in @a object_ids. 
    * </note>
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param filename The name of the file to parse.
    * @param object_ids Nul-terminated array of objects to build.
    * @return A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred.
@@ -351,8 +325,6 @@ public:
    * @param buffer The string to parse.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer);
 
@@ -364,8 +336,6 @@ public:
    * @param The object to build.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const char* object_id);
 
@@ -377,8 +347,6 @@ public:
    * @param The object to build.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::ustring& object_id);
 
@@ -390,8 +358,6 @@ public:
    * @param The objects to build.
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   bool add_from_string(const Glib::ustring& buffer, const Glib::StringArrayHandle& object_ids);
   
@@ -403,8 +369,6 @@ public:
    * @param length The length of @a buffer (may be -1 if @buffer is nul-terminated).
    * @result true on success or false if an error occurred.
    * @throws BuilderError, Glib::MarkupError
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   bool add_from_string(const char* buffer, gsize length);
 
@@ -413,8 +377,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the object named @a name. Note that this function does not
    * increment the reference count of the returned object. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param name Name of object to get.
    * @return The object named @a name or <tt>0</tt> if
    * it could not be found in the object tree.
@@ -517,15 +479,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the translation domain of @a builder. 
    * See Gtk::Builder::property_translation_domain().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param domain The translation domain or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_translation_domain(const Glib::ustring& domain);
   
   /** Gets the translation domain of @a builder.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return The translation domain. This string is owned
    * by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/button.h

@@ -241,8 +241,6 @@ public:
    * you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
    * application.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param focus_on_click Whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse.
    */
   void set_focus_on_click(bool focus_on_click =  true);
@@ -250,8 +248,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
    * See set_focus_on_click().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
    * the mouse.
    */
@@ -261,8 +257,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless 
    * the child is a Gtk::Misc or a Gtk::Aligment.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param xalign The horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned, 
    * 1.0 is right aligned.
    * @param yalign The vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned, 
@@ -271,8 +265,6 @@ public:
   void set_alignment(float xalign, float yalign);
   
   /** Gets the alignment of the child in the button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param xalign Return location for horizontal alignment.
    * @param yalign Return location for vertical alignment.
@@ -285,8 +277,6 @@ public:
    * image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
    * Gtk::Widget::show() on @a image yourself.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param image A widget to set as the image for the button.
    */
   void set_image(Widget& image);
@@ -294,16 +284,12 @@ public:
   /** Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @a button.
    *     This may have been explicitly set by set_image()
    *     or specified as a stock item to the constructor.
-   * 
-   *     @newin{2,6}
    */
   Widget* get_image();
   
   /** Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @a button.
    *     This may have been explicitly set by set_image()
    *     or specified as a stock item to the constructor.
-   * 
-   *     @newin{2,6}
    */
   const Widget* get_image() const;
 
@@ -311,8 +297,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the position of the image relative to the text 
    * inside the button.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param position The position.
    */
   void set_image_position(PositionType position);
@@ -320,8 +304,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the position of the image relative to the text 
    * inside the button.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The position.
    */
   PositionType get_image_position() const;
@@ -330,8 +312,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the button's event window if it is realized, <tt>0</tt> otherwise.
    * This function should be rarely needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return  @a button's event window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_event_window();
@@ -339,8 +319,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the button's event window if it is realized, <tt>0</tt> otherwise.
    * This function should be rarely needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return  @a button's event window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_event_window() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/buttonbox.h

@@ -154,8 +154,6 @@ public:
   void set_child_secondary(Widget& child, bool is_secondary =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether @a child should appear in a secondary group of children.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param child A child of @a widget.
    * @return Whether @a child should appear in a secondary group of children.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/celllayout.h

@@ -137,8 +137,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer.
    * @param expand <tt>true</tt> if @a cell is to be given extra space allocated to @a cell_layout.
    */
@@ -150,8 +148,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer.
    * @param expand <tt>true</tt> if @a cell is to be given extra space allocated to @a cell_layout.
    */
@@ -161,24 +157,18 @@ public:
   /** Return value: a list of cell renderers.
    * 
    * @return A list of cell renderers.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle<CellRenderer*> get_cells();
   
   /** Return value: a list of cell renderers.
    * 
    * @return A list of cell renderers.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle<const CellRenderer*> get_cells() const;
 
   
   /** Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on @a cell_layout and
    * removes all renderers from @a cell_layout.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void clear();
 
@@ -191,8 +181,6 @@ public:
    * of the model contains strings, you could have the "text" attribute of a
    * Gtk::CellRendererText get its values from column 2.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer.
    * @param attribute An attribute on the renderer.
    * @param column The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
@@ -212,8 +200,6 @@ public:
   /** Clears all existing attributes previously set with
    * set_attributes().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
    */
   void clear_attributes(CellRenderer& cell);
@@ -222,8 +208,6 @@ public:
   /** Re-inserts @a cell at @a position. Note that @a cell has already to be packed
    * into @a cell_layout for this to function properly.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer to reorder.
    * @param position New position to insert @a cell at.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderer.h

@@ -311,8 +311,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param xalign The x alignment of the cell renderer.
    * @param yalign The y alignment of the cell renderer.
@@ -320,8 +318,6 @@ public:
   void set_alignment(float align, float yalign);
   
   /** Fills in @a xalign and @a yalign with the appropriate values of @a cell.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param xalign Location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param yalign Location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or <tt>0</tt>.
@@ -330,8 +326,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the renderer's padding.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param xpad The x padding of the cell renderer.
    * @param ypad The y padding of the cell renderer.
@@ -339,8 +333,6 @@ public:
   void set_padding(int xpad, int ypad);
   
   /** Fills in @a xpad and @a ypad with the appropriate values of @a cell.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param xpad Location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param ypad Location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or <tt>0</tt>.
@@ -349,32 +341,24 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the cell renderer's visibility.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param visible The visibility of the cell.
    */
   void set_visible(bool visible =  true);
   
   /** Returns the cell renderer's visibility.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the cell renderer is visible.
    */
   bool get_visible() const;
   
   /** Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param sensitive The sensitivity of the cell.
    */
   void set_sensitive(bool sensitive =  true);
   
   /** Returns the cell renderer's sensitivity.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the cell renderer is sensitive.
    */
@@ -389,8 +373,6 @@ public:
    * This function is for use only by implementations of cell renderers that 
    * need to notify the client program that an editing process was canceled 
    * and the changes were not committed.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * Deprecated: 2.6: Use stop_editing() instead
    * 
    * @deprecated Use stop_editing().
@@ -407,8 +389,6 @@ public:
    * in response to the Gtk::CellEditable::signal_editing_done() signal of 
    * Gtk::CellEditable.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param canceled <tt>true</tt> if the editing has been canceled.
    */
   void stop_editing(bool canceled =  false);
@@ -451,8 +431,6 @@ public:
    * Note that this signal does not work yet in gtkmm.
    * See http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=301597
    *
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   *
    * @param editable the CellEditable.
    * @param path the path identifying the edited cell.
    *

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendereraccel.h

@@ -86,7 +86,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * simply typing the new combination.
  *
  * @ingroup TreeView
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 
 class CellRendererAccel : public CellRendererText

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererprogress.h

@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@ namespace Gtk
 /** Renders numbers as progress bars.
  *
  * @ingroup TreeView
- * @newin{2,6}
  */
 
 class CellRendererProgress : public CellRenderer

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrendererspin.h

@@ -55,7 +55,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * signal. 
  *
  * @ingroup TreeView
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 
 class CellRendererSpin : public CellRendererText

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellrenderertoggle.h

@@ -144,15 +144,11 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
    * set_activatable().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the cell renderer is activatable.
    */
   bool get_activatable() const;
   
   /** Makes the cell renderer activatable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param setting The value to set.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/cellview.h

@@ -139,8 +139,6 @@ public:
    * set, it will remove it before setting the new model. Use unset_model() to
    * unset the old model.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param model A Gtk::TreeModel.
    */
   void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel>& model);
@@ -148,8 +146,6 @@ public:
   /** Remove the model from the CellView.
    *
    * @see set_model().
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unset_model();
 
@@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model for @a cell_view. If no model is used <tt>0</tt> is
    * returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel used or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel> get_model();
@@ -166,8 +160,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model for @a cell_view. If no model is used <tt>0</tt> is
    * returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel used or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const TreeModel> get_model() const;
@@ -180,8 +172,6 @@ public:
    * a needed intermediate state if say, the model for
    * the Gtk::CellView becomes temporarily empty.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath or <tt>0</tt> to unset.
    */
   void set_displayed_row(const TreeModel::Path& path);
@@ -190,8 +180,6 @@ public:
    * displayed row. If no row is currently displayed, 
    * <tt>0</tt> is returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The currently displayed row or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   TreeModel::Path get_displayed_row() const;
@@ -199,8 +187,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets @a requisition to the size needed by @a cell_view to display 
    * the model row pointed to by @a path.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath.
    * @param requisition Return location for the size.
    * @return <tt>true</tt>.
@@ -209,8 +195,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the background color of @a view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param color The new background color.
    */
@@ -220,8 +204,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @a cell_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.18: use Gtk::CellLayout::get_cells() instead.
    * 
@@ -236,8 +218,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Returns the cell renderers which have been added to @a cell_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.18: use Gtk::CellLayout::get_cells() instead.
    * 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/checkmenuitem.h

@@ -146,16 +146,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets whether @a check_menu_item is drawn like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param draw_as_radio Whether @a check_menu_item is drawn like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem.
    */
   void set_draw_as_radio(bool draw_as_radio =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether @a check_menu_item looks like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Whether @a check_menu_item looks like a Gtk::RadioMenuItem.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/clipboard.h

@@ -169,8 +169,6 @@ public:
    * if your application called "Foo" has a special-purpose
    * clipboard, you might call it "_FOO_SPECIAL_CLIPBOARD".
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param display The display for which the clipboard is to be retrieved or created.
    * @param selection A Gdk::Atom which identifies the clipboard
    * to use.
@@ -185,16 +183,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Display> get_display();
   
   /** Gets the Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The Gdk::Display associated with @a clipboard.
    */
@@ -266,8 +260,6 @@ public:
    * for the image, and for converting the image into the 
    * requested format.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf.
    */
   void set_image(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf);
@@ -338,8 +330,6 @@ public:
   * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.
   *
   * @param slot A slot to call when the URIs are received, or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.)
-  *
-  * @newin{2,14}
   */
   void request_uris(const SlotUrisReceived& slot);
   
@@ -379,8 +369,6 @@ public:
    *             one way or the other.) Remember that Glib::StringArrayHandle
    *             is an intermediate type, so you should convert it to a
    *             standard C++ container.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void request_targets(const SlotTargetsReceived& slot);
   
@@ -420,8 +408,6 @@ public:
    * the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
    * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A newly-allocated Gdk::Pixbuf object which must
    * be disposed with Glib::object_unref(), or <tt>0</tt> if 
    * retrieving the selection data failed. (This 
@@ -456,8 +442,6 @@ public:
    * wait_for_rich_text() since it doesn't need to retrieve
    * the actual text.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param buffer A Gtk::TextBuffer.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> is there is rich text available, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -473,8 +457,6 @@ public:
    * wait_for_image() since it doesn't need to retrieve
    * the actual image data.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> is there is an image available, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool wait_is_image_available() const;
@@ -489,8 +471,6 @@ public:
    * wait_for_uris() since it doesn't need to retrieve
    * the actual URI data.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> is there is an URI list available, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool wait_is_uris_available() const;
@@ -502,8 +482,6 @@ public:
    * If you want to see if there's text available on the clipboard, use
    * wait_is_text_available() instead.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param target A Gdk::Atom indicating which target to look for.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the target is available, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -514,8 +492,6 @@ public:
    * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
    *
    * @result targets: The targets.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   Glib::StringArrayHandle wait_for_targets() const;
   
@@ -524,8 +500,6 @@ public:
    * for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
    * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A newly-allocated
    * <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings which must
    * be freed with Glib::strfreev(), or <tt>0</tt> if
@@ -558,8 +532,6 @@ public:
   
   /** Stores the current clipboard data somewhere so that it will stay
    * around after the application has quit.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void store();
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorbutton.h

@@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public:
    * the current selected color. When the button is clicked, a color-selection dialog will
    * open, allowing the user to select a color. The swatch will be updated to reflect the
    * new color when the user finishes.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   ColorButton();
   
@@ -132,23 +130,17 @@ public:
    * after the default constructor.
    *
    * @param color A Gdk::Color to set the current color with.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
     explicit ColorButton(const Gdk::Color& color);
 
 
   /** Sets the current color to be @a color.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param color A Gdk::Color to set the current color with.
    */
   void set_color(const Gdk::Color& color);
   
   /** Sets the current opacity to be @a alpha. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param alpha An integer between 0 and 65535.
    */
@@ -159,47 +151,35 @@ public:
    * Changes to the return value will have no effect on the Gtk::ColorButton.
    *
    * @return A Gdk::Color representing the current internal color of the Gtk::ColorButton.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   Gdk::Color get_color() const;
   
   
   /** Returns the current alpha value. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return An integer between 0 and 65535.
    */
   guint16 get_alpha() const;
   
   /** Sets whether or not the color button should use the alpha channel.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param use_alpha <tt>true</tt> if color button should use alpha channel, <tt>false</tt> if not.
    */
   void set_use_alpha(bool use_alpha =  true);
   
   /** Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the color sample uses alpha channel, <tt>false</tt> if not.
    */
   bool get_use_alpha() const;
   
   /** Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param title String containing new window title.
    */
   void set_title(const Glib::ustring& title);
   
   /** Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The title.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/colorselection.h

@@ -347,16 +347,12 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Retrieves the Gtk::ColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The embedded Gtk::ColorSelection.
    */
   ColorSelection* get_color_selection();
   
   /** Retrieves the Gtk::ColorSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The embedded Gtk::ColorSelection.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/combobox.h

@@ -142,16 +142,12 @@ public:
 
   /** Creates a new empty #GtkComboBox, optionally with an entry.
    * @param has_entry If this is true then this will have an Entry widget.
-   *
-   * newin{2,24}
    */
   explicit ComboBox(bool has_entry); //has_entry has a default value in gtkmm-3.0 but can't here because we already have a default constructor.
   
   /** Creates a new ComboBox with the model initialized to @a model.
    * @param model The model containing data to display in the ComboBox.
    * @param has_entry If this is true then this will have an Entry widget.
-   *
-   * newin{2,24}
    */
   explicit ComboBox(const Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel>& model, bool has_entry); //has_entry has a default value in gtkmm-3.0 but can't here because we already have a default constructor.
   
@@ -160,8 +156,6 @@ public:
    * the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
    * in a table.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param width Preferred number of columns.
    */
   void set_wrap_width(int width);
@@ -170,8 +164,6 @@ public:
    * for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box 
    * is in table mode.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The wrap width.
    */
   int get_wrap_width() const;
@@ -181,15 +173,11 @@ public:
    * The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
    * an item should span.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param row_span A column in the model passed during construction.
    */
   void set_row_span_column(int row_span);
   
   /** Returns the column with row span information for @a combo_box.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The row span column.
    */
@@ -200,15 +188,11 @@ public:
    *  @a column_span. The column span column contains integers which indicate
    * how many columns an item should span.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param column_span A column in the model passed during construction.
    */
   void set_column_span_column(int column_span);
   
   /** Returns the column with column span information for @a combo_box.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The column span column.
    */
@@ -224,8 +208,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff 
    * menu item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param add_tearoffs <tt>true</tt> to add tearoff menu items.
    */
   void set_add_tearoffs(bool add_tearoffs =  true);
@@ -234,16 +216,12 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode. See
    * set_add_tearoffs().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The menu's title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the
    * string which must not be freed.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_title() const;
   
   /** Sets the menu's title in tearoff mode.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param title A title for the menu in tearoff mode.
    */
@@ -253,8 +231,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked 
    * with the mouse. See set_focus_on_click().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the combo box grabs focus when it is 
    * clicked with the mouse.
    */
@@ -265,8 +241,6 @@ public:
    * like toolbars where you don't want the keyboard focus removed from 
    * the main area of the application.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param focus_on_click Whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked 
    * with the mouse.
    */
@@ -280,8 +254,6 @@ public:
    * <tt>gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]</tt>, where 
    * <tt>path</tt> is the Gtk::TreePath of the active item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return An integer which is the index of the currently active item, 
    * or -1 if there's no active item.
    */
@@ -299,8 +271,6 @@ public:
   
     
   /** Sets the active item of @a combo_box to be the item at @a index.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param index An index in the model passed during construction, or -1 to have
    * no active item.
@@ -310,16 +280,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @a iter, or
    * unsets the active item if @a iter is <tt>0</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param iter The Gtk::TreeIter, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_active(const TreeModel::iterator& iter);
   
   //TODO: See https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=612396#c30
   /** Get the text in the entry, if there is an entry.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
   Glib::ustring get_entry_text() const;
 
@@ -329,8 +295,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the Gtk::TreeModel which is acting as data source for @a combo_box.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel which was passed
    * during construction.
@@ -338,8 +302,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel> get_model();
   
   /** Returns the Gtk::TreeModel which is acting as data source for @a combo_box.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel which was passed
    * during construction.
@@ -353,8 +315,6 @@ public:
    * call Gtk::CellLayout::clear() yourself if you need to set up different
    * cell renderers for the new model.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param model A Gtk::TreeModel.
    */
   void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel>& model);
@@ -362,8 +322,6 @@ public:
   /** Remove the model from the ComboBox.
    *
    * @see set_model().
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unset_model();
 
@@ -385,8 +343,6 @@ public:
    * always sensitive (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_ON), never sensitive (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_OFF)
    * or only if there is at least one item to display (Gtk::SENSITIVITY_AUTO).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param sensitivity Specify the sensitivity of the dropdown button.
    */
   void set_button_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity);
@@ -394,8 +350,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button
    * sensitive or not when there are no items in the model.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return Gtk::SENSITIVITY_ON if the dropdown button
    * is sensitive when the model is empty, Gtk::SENSITIVITY_OFF
    * if the button is always insensitive or
@@ -406,8 +360,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns whether the combo box has an entry.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    * 
    * @return Whether there is an entry in @a combo_box.
    */
@@ -421,8 +373,6 @@ public:
    * This is only relevant if @a combo_box has been created with
    * Gtk::ComboBox::property_has_entry() as <tt>true</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from for
    * the internal entry.
    */
@@ -435,8 +385,6 @@ public:
    * This is only relevant if @a combo_box has been created with
    * Gtk::ComboBox::property_has_entry() as <tt>true</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from for
    * the internal entry.
    */
@@ -446,8 +394,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the column which @a combo_box is using to get the strings
    * from to display in the internal entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @return A column in the data source model of @a combo_box.
    */
   int get_entry_text_column() const;
@@ -457,8 +403,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
    * applications should have little use for it.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void popup();
   
@@ -466,8 +410,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
    * applications should have little use for it.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void popdown();
 
@@ -479,8 +421,6 @@ public:
    * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
    * applications should have little use for it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The accessible object corresponding
    * to the combo box's popup.
    */
@@ -495,8 +435,6 @@ public:
    * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
    * applications should have little use for it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The accessible object corresponding
    * to the combo box's popup.
    */
@@ -507,12 +445,10 @@ public:
    //These are in ComboBoxText.
 
   /** @see Bin::get_child().
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
   Entry* get_entry();
 
   /** @see Bin::get_child().
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
   const Entry* get_entry() const;
   

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/comboboxentry.h

@@ -155,8 +155,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the model column which @a entry_box should use to get strings from
    * to be @a text_column.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_entry_text_column() instead
    * 
    * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from.
@@ -166,8 +164,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the model column which @a entry_box should use to get strings from
    * to be @a text_column.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_entry_text_column() instead
    * 
    * @param text_column A column in @a model to get the strings from.
@@ -175,8 +171,6 @@ public:
   void set_text_column(int text_column) const; 
   
   /** Returns the column which @a entry_box is using to get the strings from.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_entry_text_column() instead
    * 
@@ -186,8 +180,6 @@ public:
 
   /** Returns the currently active string.
    * @result The currently active text.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   Glib::ustring get_active_text() const;
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/dialog.h

@@ -241,8 +241,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area
    * of a dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param response_id The response ID used by the @a dialog widget.
    * @return The @a widget button that uses the given @a response_id, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -251,8 +249,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area
    * of a dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param response_id The response ID used by the @a dialog widget.
    * @return The @a widget button that uses the given @a response_id, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -261,8 +257,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
    * of a dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param widget A widget in the action area of @a dialog.
    * @return The response id of @a widget, or Gtk::RESPONSE_NONE
    * if @a widget doesn't have a response id set.
@@ -296,8 +290,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::Settings object associated to @a screen, in order to be 
    * notified if the button order setting changes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen, or <tt>0</tt> to use the default screen.
    * @return Whether the alternative button order should be used.
    */
@@ -317,8 +309,6 @@ public:
    * Use this function after adding all the buttons to your dialog
    *
    * @param new_order an array of response ids of the dialog's buttons.
-   *
-   * @newinp26
    */
   void set_alternative_button_order_from_array(const Glib::ArrayHandle<int>& new_order);
   
@@ -369,16 +359,12 @@ public:
   // Changed post-2.18.2
   
   /** Returns the action area of @a dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The action area.
    */
   ButtonBox* get_action_area();
   
   /** Returns the action area of @a dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The action area.
    */
@@ -388,16 +374,12 @@ public:
   //We kept it as get_vbox() when reimplementing a MEMBER_GET with this new C function:
   
   /** Returns the content area of @a dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The content area Gtk::VBox.
    */
   VBox* get_vbox();
   
   /** Returns the content area of @a dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The content area Gtk::VBox.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entry.h

@@ -170,8 +170,6 @@ public:
   /** Get the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for
    * this widget.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::EntryBuffer object.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<EntryBuffer> get_buffer();
@@ -179,8 +177,6 @@ public:
   /** Get the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for
    * this widget.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::EntryBuffer object.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const EntryBuffer> get_buffer() const;
@@ -189,8 +185,6 @@ public:
   /** Set the Gtk::EntryBuffer object which holds the text for
    * this widget.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param buffer A Gtk::EntryBuffer.
    */
   void set_buffer(const Glib::RefPtr<EntryBuffer>& buffer);
@@ -203,8 +197,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also get_icon_window().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return The entry's text window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_text_window();
@@ -216,8 +208,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also get_icon_window().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return The entry's text window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_text_window() const;
@@ -258,8 +248,6 @@ public:
   /** Unsets the invisible char previously set with
    * set_invisible_char(). So that the
    * default invisible char is used again.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unset_invisible_char();
   
@@ -293,8 +281,6 @@ public:
    * in-place editing of some text in a canvas or list widget, where
    * pixel-exact positioning of the entry is important.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param border A Gtk::Border, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_inner_border(const Border& border);
@@ -302,24 +288,18 @@ public:
   /** This function returns the entry's Gtk::Entry::property_inner_border() property. See
    * set_inner_border() for more information.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The entry's Gtk::Border, or <tt>0</tt> if none was set.
    */
   Border get_inner_border() const;
 
   
   /** Sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the Gtk::Entry.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @param overwrite New value.
    */
   void set_overwrite_mode(bool overwrite =  true);
   
   /** Gets the value set by set_overwrite_mode().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return Whether the text is overwritten when typing.
    */
@@ -358,8 +338,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The current number of characters
    * in Gtk::Entry, or 0 if there are none.
    */
@@ -500,8 +478,6 @@ public:
    * The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system 
    * as the entry. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param adjustment An adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor 
    * is moved, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -510,8 +486,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry. 
    * See set_cursor_hadjustment().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The horizontal cursor adjustment, or <tt>0</tt>
    * if none has been set.
    */
@@ -520,8 +494,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry. 
    * See set_cursor_hadjustment().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The horizontal cursor adjustment, or <tt>0</tt>
    * if none has been set.
    */
@@ -532,8 +504,6 @@ public:
    * the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
    * text is shorter than the width of the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
    * Reversed for RTL layouts.
    */
@@ -543,16 +513,12 @@ public:
    * the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
    * text is shorter than the width of the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
    * Reversed for RTL layouts.
    */
   void set_alignment(AlignmentEnum xalign);
   
   /** Gets the value set by set_alignment().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The alignment.
    */
@@ -564,15 +530,11 @@ public:
    *  @a completion using the Gtk::EntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
    *  @a completion is set to <tt>0</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param completion The Gtk::EntryCompletion or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   void set_completion(const Glib::RefPtr<EntryCompletion>& completion);
   
   /** Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @a entry.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The auxiliary completion object currently
    * in use by @a entry.
@@ -580,8 +542,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<EntryCompletion> get_completion();
   
   /** Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by @a entry.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The auxiliary completion object currently
    * in use by @a entry.
@@ -593,8 +553,6 @@ public:
    * fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
    * inclusive.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param fraction Fraction of the task that's been completed.
    */
   void set_progress_fraction(double fraction);
@@ -602,8 +560,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
    * See set_progress_fraction().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return A fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.
    */
   double get_progress_fraction() const;
@@ -611,15 +567,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
    * bouncing block for each call to progress_pulse().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param fraction Fraction between 0.0 and 1.0.
    */
   void set_progress_pulse_step(double fraction);
   
   /** Retrieves the pulse step set with set_progress_pulse_step().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return A fraction from 0.0 to 1.0.
    */
@@ -631,8 +583,6 @@ public:
    * progress_pulse() causes the block to move by a little bit
    * (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
    * set_progress_pulse_step()).
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void progress_pulse();
 
@@ -641,8 +591,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * If @a pixbuf is <tt>0</tt>, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -655,8 +603,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * If @a stock_id is <tt>0</tt>, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @param stock_id The name of the stock item, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -672,8 +618,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * If @a icon_name is <tt>0</tt>, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon.
    * @param icon_name An icon name, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -688,8 +632,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * If @a icon is <tt>0</tt>, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon.
    * @param icon The icon to set, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -701,8 +643,6 @@ public:
    * to store image data. If the icon has no image data,
    * the return value will be Gtk::IMAGE_EMPTY.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return Image representation being used.
    */
@@ -714,8 +654,6 @@ public:
    * method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
    * Gdk::Pixbuf, a Icon, a stock item, or an icon name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is
    * set for this position.
@@ -728,8 +666,6 @@ public:
    * method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
    * Gdk::Pixbuf, a Icon, a stock item, or an icon name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is
    * set for this position.
@@ -740,8 +676,6 @@ public:
    * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
    * pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return A stock id, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is set or if the icon
    * wasn't set from a stock id.
@@ -752,8 +686,6 @@ public:
    * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
    * pixbuf, stock or gicon).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return An icon name, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is set or if the icon
    * wasn't set from an icon name.
@@ -764,8 +696,6 @@ public:
    * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
    * stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return A Icon, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is set
    * or if the icon is not a Icon.
@@ -776,8 +706,6 @@ public:
    * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
    * stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return A Icon, or <tt>0</tt> if no icon is set
    * or if the icon is not a Icon.
@@ -786,8 +714,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @param activatable <tt>true</tt> if the icon should be activatable.
@@ -797,8 +723,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Returns whether the icon is activatable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the icon is activatable.
@@ -806,8 +730,6 @@ public:
   bool get_icon_activatable(EntryIconPosition icon_pos =  ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY) const;
   
   /** Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @param sensitive Specifies whether the icon should appear
@@ -816,8 +738,6 @@ public:
   void set_icon_sensitive(EntryIconPosition icon_pos =  ENTRY_ICON_PRIMARY, bool sensitive =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the icon is sensitive.
@@ -829,8 +749,6 @@ public:
    * This function is intended for use in a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip()
    * signal handler.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param x The x coordinate of the position to find.
    * @param y The y coordinate of the position to find.
    * @return The index of the icon at the given position, or -1.
@@ -846,8 +764,6 @@ public:
    * See also Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_text() and 
    * set_icon_tooltip_markup().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The icon position.
    * @param tooltip The contents of the tooltip for the icon, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -858,8 +774,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified 
    * position in @a entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The icon position.
    * @return The tooltip text, or <tt>0</tt>. Free the returned string
    * with Glib::free() when done.
@@ -876,8 +790,6 @@ public:
    * See also Gtk::Widget::set_tooltip_markup() and 
    * gtk_enty_set_icon_tooltip_text().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The icon position.
    * @param tooltip The contents of the tooltip for the icon, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -888,8 +800,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified 
    * position in @a entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos The icon position.
    * @return The tooltip text, or <tt>0</tt>. Free the returned string
    * with Glib::free() when done.
@@ -911,8 +821,6 @@ public:
    * have to use Glib::signal_connect_after() to ensure that your signal handler
    * gets executed after the default handler.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @param target_list The targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided.
    * @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions.
@@ -927,8 +835,6 @@ public:
    * This function is meant to be used in a Gtk::Widget::signal_drag_data_get()
    * callback.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return Index of the icon which is the source of the current
    * DND operation, or -1.
    */
@@ -942,8 +848,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also get_text_window().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return The entry's icon window at @a icon_pos.
    */
@@ -956,8 +860,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also get_text_window().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param icon_pos Icon position.
    * @return The entry's icon window at @a icon_pos.
    */
@@ -975,8 +877,6 @@ public:
    * and the default key event handling of the Gtk::Entry.
    * See Gtk::TextView::reset_im_context() for an example of use.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param event The key event.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the input method handled the key event.
    */
@@ -986,8 +886,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
    * would confuse on-going input method behavior.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    */
   void reset_im_context();
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrybuffer.h

@@ -63,8 +63,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory,
  * useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could 
  * integrate with an application's concept of undo/redo.
- *
- * @@newin{2,20}
  */
 
 class EntryBuffer : public Glib::Object
@@ -146,15 +144,11 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.
    * See get_length().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return The byte length of the buffer.
    */
   gsize get_bytes() const;
   
   /** Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The number of characters in the buffer.
    */
@@ -165,8 +159,6 @@ public:
    * The memory pointer returned by this call will not change
    * unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return A pointer to the contents of the widget as a
    * string. This string points to internally allocated
    * storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or
@@ -186,8 +178,6 @@ public:
    * the current contents are longer than the given length, then they
    * will be truncated to fit.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param max_length The maximum length of the entry buffer, or 0 for no maximum.
    * (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will
    * be clamped to the range 0-65536.
@@ -197,8 +187,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
    *  @a buffer. See set_max_length().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return The maximum allowed number of characters
    * in Gtk::EntryBuffer, or 0 if there is no maximum.
    */
@@ -222,8 +210,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param position Position at which to delete text.
    * @param n_chars Number of characters to delete.
    * @return The number of characters deleted.
@@ -238,8 +224,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Used when subclassing Gtk::EntryBuffer
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param position Position at which text was deleted.
    * @param n_chars Number of characters deleted.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/entrycompletion.h

@@ -137,16 +137,12 @@ public:
   //Careful, this actually returns a GtkWidget*, so it might not always be a GtkEntry in future GTK+ versions.
   
   /** Gets the entry @a completion has been attached to.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The entry @a completion has been attached to.
    */
   Entry* get_entry();
   
   /** Gets the entry @a completion has been attached to.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The entry @a completion has been attached to.
    */
@@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public:
    * a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model.
    * Use unset_model() to unset the old model.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param model The Gtk::TreeModel.
    */
   void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel>& model);
@@ -166,8 +160,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model the Gtk::EntryCompletion is using as data source.
    * Returns <tt>0</tt> if the model is unset.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or <tt>0</tt> if none
    * is currently being used.
    */
@@ -176,8 +168,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model the Gtk::EntryCompletion is using as data source.
    * Returns <tt>0</tt> if the model is unset.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or <tt>0</tt> if none
    * is currently being used.
    */
@@ -186,8 +176,6 @@ public:
   /** Remove the model from the EntryCompletion.
    *
    * @see set_model().
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unset_model();
 
@@ -202,15 +190,11 @@ public:
    * key takes a lot of time and will come up with meaningless results anyway
    * (ie, a too large dataset).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param length The minimum length of the key in order to start completing.
    */
   void set_minimum_key_length(int length);
   
   /** Returns the minimum key length as set for @a completion.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The currently used minimum key length.
    */
@@ -219,15 +203,11 @@ public:
   /** Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
    * current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
    * view will be updated accordingly.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void complete();
 
   
   /** Requests a prefix insertion. 
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void insert_prefix();
 
@@ -246,8 +226,6 @@ public:
   //TODO: Change default - it would be nicer to delete the last action instead of the first.
   
   /** Deletes the action at @a index from @a completion's action list.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param index The index of the item to Delete.
    */
@@ -257,8 +235,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
    * be automatically inserted in the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param inline_completion <tt>true</tt> to do inline completion.
    */
   void set_inline_completion(bool inline_completion =  true);
@@ -266,8 +242,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
    * be automatically inserted in the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if inline completion is turned on.
    */
   bool get_inline_completion() const;
@@ -275,31 +249,23 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether it is possible to cycle through the possible completions
    * inside the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param inline_selection <tt>true</tt> to do inline selection.
    */
   void set_inline_selection(bool inline_selection =  true);
   
   /** Returns <tt>true</tt> if inline-selection mode is turned on.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if inline-selection mode is on.
    */
   bool get_inline_selection() const;
   
   /** Sets whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param popup_completion <tt>true</tt> to do popup completion.
    */
   void set_popup_completion(bool popup_completion =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if popup completion is turned on.
    */
@@ -309,8 +275,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same
    * width as the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param popup_set_width <tt>true</tt> to make the width of the popup the same as the entry.
    */
   void set_popup_set_width(bool popup_set_width =  true);
@@ -318,8 +282,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the  completion popup window will be resized to the 
    * width of the entry.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the popup window will be resized to the width of 
    * the entry.
    */
@@ -333,8 +295,6 @@ public:
    * are using inline
    * completion.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @deprecated Use set_popup_single_match() instead. This function was wrongly named.
    * 
    * @param popup_single_match <tt>true</tt> if the popup should appear even for a single
@@ -349,8 +309,6 @@ public:
    * are using inline
    * completion.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param popup_single_match <tt>true</tt> if the popup should appear even for a single
    * match.
    */
@@ -360,8 +318,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
    * only a single match. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the popup window will appear regardless of the
    * number of matches.
    */
@@ -371,8 +327,6 @@ public:
    * the completion or an empty string if there's no completion ongoing.
    * 
    * @return The prefix for the current completion
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_completion_prefix() const;
 
@@ -386,8 +340,6 @@ public:
    * column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell 
    * renderer, use Glib::object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param column The column in the model of @a completion to get strings from.
    */
   void set_text_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column);
@@ -401,8 +353,6 @@ public:
    * column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell 
    * renderer, use Glib::object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param column The column in the model of @a completion to get strings from.
    */
   void set_text_column(int column);
@@ -410,8 +360,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Returns the column in the model of @a completion to get strings from.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @deprecated Use the const version of this method.
    * 
@@ -422,8 +370,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Returns the column in the model of @a completion to get strings from.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The column containing the strings.
    */
@@ -480,8 +426,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @par Prototype:
    * <tt>bool %on_cursor_on_match(const TreeModel::iterator& iter)</tt>
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   Glib::SignalProxy1< bool, const TreeModel::iterator& > signal_cursor_on_match();
 
@@ -499,8 +443,6 @@ public:
    * the FileChooser inserts only the part of the prefix up to the 
    * next '/'.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   *
    * @param prefix The common prefix of all possible completions.
    * @result true if the signal has been handled
    *

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/enums.h

@@ -1694,8 +1694,6 @@ public:
    * @param height Location to store icon height.
    * @param settings A Gtk::Settings object, used to determine which set of user preferences to used.
    * @result true if size was a valid size. 
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    */
   static bool lookup(IconSize size, int& width, int& height, const Glib::RefPtr<Gtk::Settings>& settings);
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/eventbox.h

@@ -116,8 +116,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the event box has a visible window.
    * See set_visible_window() for details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the event box window is visible.
    */
   bool get_visible_window() const;
@@ -158,8 +156,6 @@ public:
    * descendant windows, not just at the same place on the screen.
    * </note>
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param visible_window Boolean value.
    */
   void set_visible_window(bool visible_window =  true);
@@ -168,8 +164,6 @@ public:
    * windows of its child. See set_above_child() for
    * details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the event box window is above the window
    * of its child.
    */
@@ -183,8 +177,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * The default is to keep the window below the child.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param above_child <tt>true</tt> if the event box window is above the windows of its child.
    */
   void set_above_child(bool above_child =  true);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/expander.h

@@ -128,8 +128,6 @@ public:
   /** Creates a new Expander.
    *
    * The Expander has an empty label.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   Expander();
 
@@ -143,8 +141,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @param label The string for the label describing the Expander.
    * @param mnemonic Wether the label may contain underscores to set up accelerators.
-
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   explicit Expander(const Glib::ustring& label, bool mnemonic = false);
   //gtkmmproc error: gkt_expander_new_with_mnemonic : ignored method defs lookup failed
@@ -154,8 +150,6 @@ public:
    * the child widget to be revealed, and <tt>false</tt> if you want the
    * child widget to be hidden.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param expanded Whether the child widget is revealed.
    */
   void set_expanded(bool expanded =  true);
@@ -165,8 +159,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See set_expanded().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The current state of the expander.
    */
   bool get_expanded() const;
@@ -175,15 +167,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the spacing field of @a expander, which is the number of pixels to
    * place between expander and the child.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param spacing Distance between the expander and child in pixels.
    */
   void set_spacing(int spacing);
   
   /** Gets the value set by set_spacing().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Spacing between the expander and child.
    */
@@ -194,8 +182,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This will also clear any previously set labels.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param label A string.
    */
   void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label);
@@ -212,8 +198,6 @@ public:
    * be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
    * widget.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The text of the label widget. This string is owned
    * by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
    */
@@ -223,8 +207,6 @@ public:
   /** If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
    * the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param use_underline <tt>true</tt> if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.
    */
   void set_use_underline(bool use_underline =  true);
@@ -232,8 +214,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label indicates a
    * mnemonic. See set_use_underline().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if an embedded underline in the expander label
    * indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
    */
@@ -243,8 +223,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in Pango's text markup
    * language. See Gtk::Label::set_markup().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param use_markup <tt>true</tt> if the label's text should be parsed for markup.
    */
   void set_use_markup(bool use_markup =  true);
@@ -253,8 +231,6 @@ public:
    * the Pango text markup
    * language. See set_use_markup().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the label's text will be parsed for markup.
    */
   bool get_use_markup() const;
@@ -263,8 +239,6 @@ public:
   /** Set the label widget for the expander. This is the widget
    * that will appear embedded alongside the expander arrow.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param label_widget The new label widget.
    */
   void set_label_widget(Widget& label_widget);
@@ -272,8 +246,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
    * set_label_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The label widget,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if there is none.
    */
@@ -282,8 +254,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
    * set_label_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The label widget,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if there is none.
    */
@@ -293,8 +263,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space
    * allocated to @a expander.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param label_fill <tt>true</tt> if the label should should fill all available horizontal
    * space.
    */
@@ -303,8 +271,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the label widget will fill all available horizontal
    * space allocated to @a expander.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the label widget will fill all available horizontal
    * space.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooser.h

@@ -276,8 +276,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE but not if the action is
    * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param action The action that the file selector is performing.
    */
   void set_action(FileChooserAction action);
@@ -285,8 +283,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
    * set_action().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The action that the file selector is performing.
    */
   FileChooserAction get_action() const;
@@ -301,8 +297,6 @@ public:
    * rather than the URI functions like
    * get_uri(),
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param local_only <tt>true</tt> if only local files can be selected.
    */
   void set_local_only(bool local_only =  true);
@@ -310,8 +304,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
    * file selector. See set_local_only()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if only local files can be selected.
    */
   bool get_local_only() const;
@@ -320,8 +312,6 @@ public:
    * only relevant if the action is set to be Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN or
    * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param select_multiple <tt>true</tt> if multiple files can be selected.
    */
   void set_select_multiple(bool select_multiple =  true);
@@ -329,16 +319,12 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
    * selector. See set_select_multiple().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if multiple files can be selected.
    */
   bool get_select_multiple() const;
 
   
   /** Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.  
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param show_hidden <tt>true</tt> if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
    */
@@ -347,8 +333,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.   
    * See set_show_hidden().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if hidden files and folders are displayed.
    */
   bool get_show_hidden() const;
@@ -366,8 +350,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::FileChooser::signal_confirm_overwrite() signal; please refer to its documentation
    * for the details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param do_overwrite_confirmation Whether to confirm overwriting in save mode.
    */
   void set_do_overwrite_confirmation(bool do_overwrite_confirmation =  true);
@@ -375,8 +357,6 @@ public:
   /** Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
    * types a file name that already exists.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
    * <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -387,8 +367,6 @@ public:
    * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be 
    * Gtk::FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param create_folders <tt>true</tt> if the New Folder button should be displayed.
    */
   void set_create_folders(bool create_folders =  true);
@@ -396,8 +374,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
    * See set_create_folders().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the New Folder button should be displayed.
    */
   bool get_create_folders() const;
@@ -413,8 +389,6 @@ public:
    * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
    * set_current_name() as well.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param name The filename to use, as a UTF-8 string.
    */
   void set_current_name(const Glib::ustring& name);
@@ -426,8 +400,6 @@ public:
    * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
    * folder.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The currently selected filename, or an empty string
    * if no file is selected, or the selected file can't
    * be represented with a local filename.
@@ -457,8 +429,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filename The filename to set as current.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the file was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -469,8 +439,6 @@ public:
    * folder of @a chooser, then the current folder of @a chooser will
    * be changed to the folder containing @a filename.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filename The filename to select.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the file was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -481,21 +449,15 @@ public:
    * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
    * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filename The filename to unselect.
    */
   void unselect_filename(const Glib::ustring& filename);
   
   /** Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void select_all();
   
   /** Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void unselect_all();
   
@@ -506,8 +468,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return A list containing the filenames of all selected
    * files and subfolders in the current folder.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::SListHandle<Glib::ustring> get_filenames() const;
   
@@ -515,8 +475,6 @@ public:
    * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
    * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filename The full path of the new current folder.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the folder could be changed successfully, <tt>false</tt>
    * otherwise.
@@ -531,8 +489,6 @@ public:
    * and empty string if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was
    * requested from it; for example, as would be for calling
    * set_current_folder() on a nonexistent folder.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_current_folder() const;
 
@@ -547,8 +503,6 @@ public:
    * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
    * folder.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The currently selected URI, or an empty string
    * if no file is selected.
    */
@@ -576,8 +530,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI to set as current.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -588,8 +540,6 @@ public:
    * file in the current folder of @a chooser, then the current folder of
    *  @a chooser will be changed to the folder containing @a filename.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI to select.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -600,8 +550,6 @@ public:
    * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
    * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI to unselect.
    */
   void unselect_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri);
@@ -611,8 +559,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return A list containing the URIs of all selected
    * files and subfolders in the current folder.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::SListHandle<Glib::ustring> get_uris() const;
 
@@ -621,8 +567,6 @@ public:
    * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
    * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI for the new current folder.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the folder could be changed successfully, <tt>false</tt>
    * otherwise.
@@ -640,8 +584,6 @@ public:
    * currently-selected folder in that mode, use get_uri() as the
    * usual way to get the selection.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The URI for the current folder.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_current_folder_uri() const;
@@ -670,8 +612,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param file The File to set as current.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the file was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -682,8 +622,6 @@ public:
   /** Selects the file referred to by @a file. An internal function. See
    * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param file The file to select.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both the folder could be changed and the path was
    * selected successfully, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -693,8 +631,6 @@ public:
   /** Unselects the file referred to by @a file. If the file is not in the current
    * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param file A File.
    */
   void unselect_file(const Glib::RefPtr<const Gio::File>& file);
@@ -703,8 +639,6 @@ public:
   /** Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of @a chooser
    * as File. An internal function, see get_uris().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A SList
    * containing a File for each selected file and subfolder in the
    * current folder.  Free the returned list with Glib::slist_free(), and
@@ -716,8 +650,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the current folder for @a chooser from a File.
    * Internal function, see set_current_folder_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param file The File for the new folder.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the folder could be changed successfully, <tt>false</tt>
    * otherwise.
@@ -729,8 +661,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current folder of @a chooser as File.
    * See get_current_folder_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The File for the current folder.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gio::File> get_current_folder_file();
@@ -744,8 +674,6 @@ public:
    * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
    * folder.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A selected File. You own the returned file;
    * use Glib::object_unref() to release it.
    */
@@ -758,8 +686,6 @@ public:
    * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
    * folder.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A selected File. You own the returned file;
    * use Glib::object_unref() to release it.
    */
@@ -782,8 +708,6 @@ public:
    * may display an internally generated preview of the current file or
    * it may display no preview at all.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param preview_widget Widget for displaying preview.
    */
   void set_preview_widget(Gtk::Widget& preview_widget);
@@ -792,8 +716,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current preview widget; see
    * set_preview_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The current preview widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Gtk::Widget* get_preview_widget();
@@ -801,8 +723,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current preview widget; see
    * set_preview_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The current preview widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   const Gtk::Widget* get_preview_widget() const;
@@ -815,8 +735,6 @@ public:
    * or it may display no preview at all. See
    * set_preview_widget() for more details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param active Whether to display the user-specified preview widget.
    */
   void set_preview_widget_active(bool active =  true);
@@ -825,8 +743,6 @@ public:
    * should be shown for the current filename. See
    * set_preview_widget_active().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
    */
   bool get_preview_widget_active() const;
@@ -839,8 +755,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also: set_preview_widget()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param use_label Whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file.
    */
   void set_use_preview_label(bool use_label =  true);
@@ -857,8 +771,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
    * widget. See set_preview_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The filename to preview, or an empty string if no file
    * is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented
    * as a local filename.
@@ -868,8 +780,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
    * widget. See set_preview_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The URI for the file to preview, or an empty string if no file is
    * selected.
    */
@@ -880,8 +790,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the File that should be previewed in a custom preview
    * Internal function, see get_preview_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The File for the file to preview,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if no file is selected. Free with Glib::object_unref().
    */
@@ -890,8 +798,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the File that should be previewed in a custom preview
    * Internal function, see get_preview_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The File for the file to preview,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if no file is selected. Free with Glib::object_unref().
    */
@@ -901,8 +807,6 @@ public:
  */
   
   /** Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param extra_widget Widget for extra options.
    */
@@ -911,8 +815,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current preview widget; see
    * set_extra_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The current extra widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Gtk::Widget* get_extra_widget();
@@ -920,8 +822,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the current preview widget; see
    * set_extra_widget().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The current extra widget, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   const Gtk::Widget* get_extra_widget() const;
@@ -936,15 +836,11 @@ public:
    * Note that the @a chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to 
    * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter.
    */
   void add_filter(const FileFilter& filter);
   
   /** Removes @a filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter.
    */
@@ -956,8 +852,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return A list containing the current set of
    * user selectable filters.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::SListHandle< FileFilter* > list_filters();
   
@@ -966,8 +860,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return A list containing the current set of
    * user selectable filters.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::SListHandle< const FileFilter* > list_filters() const;
 
@@ -981,23 +873,17 @@ public:
    * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
    * set of files without letting the user change it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::FileFilter.
    */
   void set_filter(const FileFilter& filter);
   
   /** Gets the current filter; see set_filter().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The current filter, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   FileFilter* get_filter();
   
   /** Gets the current filter; see set_filter().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The current filter, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -1011,8 +897,6 @@ public:
    * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
    * "/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param folder Filename of the folder to add.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the folder could be added successfully, <tt>false</tt>
    * otherwise.  In the latter case, the @a error will be set as appropriate.
@@ -1020,8 +904,6 @@ public:
   bool add_shortcut_folder(const Glib::ustring& folder);
   
   /** Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param folder Filename of the folder to remove.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the operation succeeds, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.  
@@ -1034,8 +916,6 @@ public:
   /** Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
    * add_shortcut_folder().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A list of folder filenames, if there are any shortcut
    * folders..
    */
@@ -1047,8 +927,6 @@ public:
    * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
    * "file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param uri URI of the folder to add.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the folder could be added successfully, <tt>false</tt>
    * otherwise.  In the latter case, the @a error will be set as appropriate.
@@ -1056,8 +934,6 @@ public:
   bool add_shortcut_folder_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri);
   
   /** Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param uri URI of the folder to remove.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the operation succeeds, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.  
@@ -1071,8 +947,6 @@ public:
    * add_shortcut_folder_uri().
    * 
    * @return A list of folder URIs
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::SListHandle<Glib::ustring> list_shortcut_folder_uris() const;
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserbutton.h

@@ -154,15 +154,11 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @a button. The returned value
    * should not be modified or freed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A pointer to the browse dialog's title.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_title() const;
   
   /** Modifies the @a title of the browse dialog used by @a button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param title The new browse dialog title.
    */
@@ -170,16 +166,12 @@ public:
  
   
   /** Retrieves the width in characters of the @a button widget's entry and/or label.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return An integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
    */
   int get_width_chars() const;
   
   /** Sets the width (in characters) that @a button will use to @a n_chars.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param n_chars The new width, in characters.
    */
@@ -189,8 +181,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
    * See set_focus_on_click().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with
    * the mouse.
    */
@@ -201,8 +191,6 @@ public:
    * you don't want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
    * application.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param focus_on_click Whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse.
    */
   void set_focus_on_click(gboolean focus_on_click =  true);   

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filechooserwidget.h

@@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public:
    * custom windows, and it is the same widget that is used by Gtk::FileChooserDialog.
    *
    * @param action Open or save mode for the widget
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
     explicit FileChooserWidget(FileChooserAction action);
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/filefilter.h

@@ -196,16 +196,12 @@ public:
    * that will be displayed in the file selector user interface if
    * there is a selectable list of filters.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param name The human-readable-name for the filter, or <tt>0</tt>
    * to remove any existing name.
    */
   void set_name(const Glib::ustring& name);
   
   /** Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See set_name().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The human-readable name of the filter,
    * or <tt>0</tt>. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not
@@ -215,16 +211,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @a filter.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param mime_type Name of a MIME type.
    */
   void add_mime_type(const Glib::ustring& mime_type);
   
   /** Adds a rule allowing a shell style glob to a filter.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param pattern A shell style glob.
    */
@@ -232,8 +224,6 @@ public:
   
   /** Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported
    * by GdkPixbuf.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void add_pixbuf_formats();
 
@@ -260,8 +250,6 @@ public:
    * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
    * Gtk::FileChooser.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return Bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
    * calling filter().
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontbutton.h

@@ -116,48 +116,36 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the title of the font selection dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return An internal copy of the title string which must not be freed.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_title() const;
   
   /** Sets the title for the font selection dialog.  
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param title A string containing the font selection dialog title.
    */
   void set_title(const Glib::ustring& title);
   
   /** Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Whether the selected font is used in the label.
    */
   bool get_use_font() const;
   
   /** If @a use_font is <tt>true</tt>, the font name will be written using the selected font.  
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param use_font If <tt>true</tt>, font name will be written using font chosen.
    */
   void set_use_font(bool use_font =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Whether the selected size is used in the label.
    */
   bool get_use_size() const;
   
   /** If @a use_size is <tt>true</tt>, the font name will be written using the selected size.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param use_size If <tt>true</tt>, font name will be written using the selected size.
    */
@@ -170,15 +158,11 @@ public:
    * style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
    * Pango::FontDescription object.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return An internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_font_name() const;
   
   /** Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param fontname Name of font to display in font selection dialog.
    * @return Return value of Gtk::FontSelectionDialog::set_font_name() if the
@@ -187,32 +171,24 @@ public:
   bool set_font_name(const Glib::ustring& fontname);
   
   /** Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Whether the font style will be shown in the label.
    */
   bool get_show_style() const;
   
   /** If @a show_style is <tt>true</tt>, the font style will be displayed along with name of the selected font.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param show_style <tt>true</tt> if font style should be displayed in label.
    */
   void set_show_style(bool show_style =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Whether the font size will be shown in the label.
    */
   bool get_show_size() const;
   
   /** If @a show_size is <tt>true</tt>, the font size will be displayed along with the name of the selected font.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param show_size <tt>true</tt> if font size should be displayed in dialog.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/fontselection.h

@@ -127,8 +127,6 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView that lists font families, for
    * example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   TreeView* get_family_list();
@@ -136,8 +134,6 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView that lists font families, for
    * example, 'Sans', 'Serif', etc.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   const TreeView* get_family_list() const;
@@ -146,8 +142,6 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView which lists all styles available for
    * the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   TreeView* get_face_list();
@@ -155,8 +149,6 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeView which lists all styles available for
    * the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   const TreeView* get_face_list() const;
@@ -165,8 +157,6 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to allow the user to edit the font
    * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   Entry* get_size_entry();
@@ -174,24 +164,18 @@ public:
   /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to allow the user to edit the font
    * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   const Entry* get_size_entry() const;
 
   
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeeView used to list font sizes.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   TreeView* get_size_list();
   
   /** This returns the Gtk::TreeeView used to list font sizes.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
@@ -199,16 +183,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to display the font as a preview.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
   Entry* get_preview_entry();
   
   /** This returns the Gtk::Entry used to display the font as a preview.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::Widget that is part of @a fontsel.
    */
@@ -216,8 +196,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the Pango::FontFamily representing the selected font family.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Pango::FontFamily representing the
    * selected font family. Font families are a collection of font
@@ -227,8 +205,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Pango::FontFamily> get_family();
   
   /** Gets the Pango::FontFamily representing the selected font family.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Pango::FontFamily representing the
    * selected font family. Font families are a collection of font
@@ -241,8 +217,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Pango::FontFace representing the selected font group
    * details (i.e.\ family, slant, weight, width, etc).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Pango::FontFace representing the
    * selected font group details. The returned object is owned by
    *  @a fontsel and must not be modified or freed.
@@ -252,8 +226,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Pango::FontFace representing the selected font group
    * details (i.e.\ family, slant, weight, width, etc).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return A Pango::FontFace representing the
    * selected font group details. The returned object is owned by
    *  @a fontsel and must not be modified or freed.
@@ -262,8 +234,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** The selected font size.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A n integer representing the selected font size,
    * or -1 if no font size is selected.
@@ -487,8 +457,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the 'OK' button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog
    * for the 'OK' button.
@@ -496,8 +464,6 @@ public:
   Button* get_ok_button();
   
   /** Gets the 'OK' button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog
    * for the 'OK' button.
@@ -506,8 +472,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the 'Cancel' button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog
    * for the 'Cancel' button.
@@ -515,8 +479,6 @@ public:
   Button* get_cancel_button();
   
   /** Gets the 'Cancel' button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Widget used in the dialog
    * for the 'Cancel' button.
@@ -525,8 +487,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
    * 
@@ -535,8 +495,6 @@ public:
   Button* get_apply_button();
   
   /** Obtains a button. The button doesn't have any function.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Don't use this function.
    * 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/handlebox.h

@@ -146,8 +146,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Whether the handlebox's child is currently detached.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the child is currently detached, otherwise <tt>false</tt>.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconinfo.h

@@ -103,8 +103,6 @@ public:
    * the same base size as the larger icons to which
    * they are attached.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The base size, or 0, if no base
    * size is known for the icon.
    */
@@ -116,8 +114,6 @@ public:
    * no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
    * case, you should use get_builtin_pixbuf().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The filename for the icon, or <tt>0</tt>
    * if get_builtin_pixbuf() should
    * be used instead.
@@ -129,8 +125,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
    * Gtk::IconTheme::lookup_icon().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The built-in image pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * The returned image must not be modified.
    */
@@ -141,8 +135,6 @@ public:
    * Gtk::ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
    * Gtk::IconTheme::lookup_icon().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The built-in image pixbuf, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * The returned image must not be modified.
    */
@@ -160,8 +152,6 @@ public:
    * the Gtk::IconInfo. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
    * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The rendered icon; this may be a newly
    * created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must
    * not modify the icon. Use Glib::object_unref() to release your reference
@@ -184,8 +174,6 @@ public:
    * This function is provided primarily to allow compatibility wrappers
    * for older API's, and is not expected to be useful for applications.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param raw_coordinates Whether the coordinates of embedded rectangles
    * and attached points should be returned in their original
    * (unscaled) form.
@@ -198,8 +186,6 @@ public:
    * See set_raw_coordinates() for further
    * information about the coordinate system.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param rectangle Gdk::Rectangle in which to store embedded
    * rectangle coordinates; coordinates are only stored
    * when this function returns <tt>true</tt>.
@@ -212,8 +198,6 @@ public:
    * string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
    * visible context like a list of icons.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The display name for the icon or <tt>0</tt>, if
    * the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
    * is owned @a icon_info and must not be modified or free.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/icontheme.h

@@ -205,8 +205,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
    * get_for_screen().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return A unique Gtk::IconTheme associated with
    * the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
    * the screen and can be used as long as the screen
@@ -223,8 +221,6 @@ public:
    * and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
    * a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    * @return A unique Gtk::IconTheme associated with
    * the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
@@ -237,8 +233,6 @@ public:
    * to track the user's currently configured icon theme,
    * which might be different for different screens.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    */
   void set_screen(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Screen>& screen);
@@ -248,8 +242,6 @@ public:
   /** Appends a directory to the search path. 
    * See set_search_path(). 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param path Directory name to append to the icon path.
    */
   void append_search_path(const Glib::ustring& path);
@@ -257,8 +249,6 @@ public:
   /** Prepends a directory to the search path. 
    * See set_search_path().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param path Directory name to prepend to the icon path.
    */
   void prepend_search_path(const Glib::ustring& path);
@@ -268,8 +258,6 @@ public:
    * on the icon theme objects returned from get_default()
    * and get_for_screen().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param theme_name Name of icon theme to use instead of configured theme,
    * or <tt>0</tt> to unset a previously set custom theme.
    */
@@ -278,8 +266,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether an icon theme includes an icon
    * for a particular name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param icon_name The name of an icon.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a icon_theme includes an
    * icon for @a icon_name.
@@ -301,8 +287,6 @@ public:
    * @return An IconInfo structure containing information
    * about the icon. IconInfo::operator bool() will return false if the icon wasn't found.
    * For instance, if (icon_info) { ... }.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   IconInfo lookup_icon(const Glib::ustring& icon_name, int size, IconLookupFlags flags) const;
 
@@ -312,8 +296,6 @@ public:
    * The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
    * Gtk::IconInfo::load_icon().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param icon The Icon to look up.
    * @param size Desired icon size.
    * @param flags Flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup.
@@ -340,8 +322,6 @@ public:
    * @return A Gtk::IconInfo structure containing information
    * about the icon. IconInfo::operator bool() will be false if the icon wasn't found - 
    * for instance, if (icon_info) { ... }.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   IconInfo choose_icon(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& icon_names, int size, IconLookupFlags flags);
 
@@ -359,8 +339,6 @@ public:
    * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old 
    * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param icon_name The name of the icon to lookup.
    * @param size The desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be exactly this size; see Gtk::IconInfo::load_icon().
    * @param flags Flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup.
@@ -380,8 +358,6 @@ public:
    * @param context A string identifying a particular type of icon.
    * @return The names of all the
    * icons in the theme.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle<Glib::ustring> list_icons(const Glib::ustring& context) const;
 
@@ -389,8 +365,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @return A list holding the names of all the
    * icons in the theme.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}.
    */
    Glib::ListHandle<Glib::ustring> list_icons() const;
 
@@ -400,8 +374,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return A list holding the names of all the
    * contexts in the theme.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}.
    */
   Glib::ListHandle<Glib::ustring> list_contexts() const;
 
@@ -409,8 +381,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
    * current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
    * a list of themes to the user.)
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   Glib::ustring get_example_icon_name() const;
   
@@ -418,8 +388,6 @@ public:
    * currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded
    * next time @a icon_theme is accessed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the icon theme has changed and needed
    * to be reloaded.
    */
@@ -439,8 +407,6 @@ public:
    * This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
    * via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param icon_name The name of the icon to register.
    * @param size The size at which to register the icon (different
    * images can be registered for the same icon name

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/iconview.h

@@ -169,8 +169,6 @@ public:
    * it before setting the new model. Use unset_model() to
    * unset the old model.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param model The model.
    */
   void set_model(const Glib::RefPtr<TreeModel>& model);
@@ -178,8 +176,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model the Gtk::IconView is based on.  Returns <tt>0</tt> if the
    * model is unset.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or <tt>0</tt> if none is
    * currently being used.
    */
@@ -188,8 +184,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the model the Gtk::IconView is based on.  Returns <tt>0</tt> if the
    * model is unset.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::TreeModel, or <tt>0</tt> if none is
    * currently being used.
    */
@@ -198,8 +192,6 @@ public:
   /** Remove the model from the IconView.
    *
    * @see set_model().
-   *
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void unset_model();
 
@@ -207,8 +199,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the column with text for @a icon_view to be @a column. The text
    * column must be of type TYPE_STRING.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.
    */
   void set_text_column(int column);
@@ -216,15 +206,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the column with text for @a icon_view to be @a column. The text
    * column must be of type TYPE_STRING.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.
    */
   void set_text_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& model_column);
   
   /** Returns the column with text for @a icon_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The text column, or -1 if it's unset.
    */
@@ -235,8 +221,6 @@ public:
    * If the markup column is set to something, it overrides
    * the text column set by set_text_column().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.
    */
   void set_markup_column(int column);
@@ -246,15 +230,11 @@ public:
    * If the markup column is set to something, it overrides
    * the text column set by set_text_column().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text.
    */
   void set_markup_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column);
   
   /** Returns the column with markup text for @a icon_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The markup column, or -1 if it's unset.
    */
@@ -263,8 +243,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view to be @a column. The pixbuf
    * column must be of type Gdk::TYPE_PIXBUF
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable.
    */
   void set_pixbuf_column(int column);
@@ -272,15 +250,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view to be @a column. The pixbuf
    * column must be of type Gdk::TYPE_PIXBUF
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable.
    */
   void set_pixbuf_column(const TreeModelColumnBase& column);
   
   /** Returns the column with pixbufs for @a icon_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The pixbuf column, or -1 if it's unset.
    */
@@ -290,8 +264,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the property_orientation() property which determines whether the labels 
    * are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use set_item_orientation()
    * 
    * @param orientation The relative position of texts and icons.
@@ -301,8 +273,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the value of the property_orientation() property which determines 
    * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: Use get_item_orientation()
    * 
    * @return The relative position of texts and icons.
@@ -313,8 +283,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the property_item_orientation() property which determines whether
    * the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @param orientation The relative position of texts and icons.
    */
   void set_item_orientation(Orientation orientation);
@@ -322,8 +290,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the value of the property_item_orientation() property which determines
    * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return The relative position of texts and icons.
    */
   Orientation get_item_orientation() const;
@@ -334,15 +300,11 @@ public:
    * -1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically 
    * to fill the available area. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param columns The number of columns.
    */
   void set_columns(int columns);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_columns() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The number of columns, or -1.
    */
@@ -352,15 +314,11 @@ public:
    * to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will 
    * automatically determine a suitable item size.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param item_width The width for each item.
    */
   void set_item_width(int item_width);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_item_width() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The width of a single item, or -1.
    */
@@ -370,15 +328,11 @@ public:
    * which is inserted between the cells (i.e.\ the icon and 
    * the text) of an item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param spacing The spacing.
    */
   void set_spacing(int spacing);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_spacing() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The space between cells.
    */
@@ -387,15 +341,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the property_row_spacing() property which specifies the space 
    * which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param row_spacing The row spacing.
    */
   void set_row_spacing(int row_spacing);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_row_spacing() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The space between rows.
    */
@@ -404,15 +354,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the property_column_spacing() property which specifies the space 
    * which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param column_spacing The column spacing.
    */
   void set_column_spacing(int column_spacing);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_column_spacing() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The space between columns.
    */
@@ -423,15 +369,11 @@ public:
    * which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right 
    * of the icon view.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param margin The margin.
    */
   void set_margin(int margin);
   
   /** Returns the value of the property_margin() property.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The space at the borders.
    */
@@ -444,8 +386,6 @@ public:
    * See convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords() for converting
    * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param x The x position to be identified.
    * @param y The y position to be identified.
    * @return The Gtk::TreePath corresponding to the icon or <tt>0</tt>
@@ -462,8 +402,6 @@ public:
    * @param cell The renderer responsible for the cell at (@a x, @a y).
    *
    * @result true if an item exists at the specified position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path, CellRenderer*& cell) const;
 
@@ -474,8 +412,6 @@ public:
    * @param path The path.
    *
    * @result true if an item exists at the specified position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, TreeModel::Path& path) const;
 
@@ -486,8 +422,6 @@ public:
    * @param path The path.
    *
    * @result true if an item exists at the specified position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   bool get_item_at_pos(int x, int y, CellRenderer*& cell) const;
   
@@ -511,32 +445,24 @@ public:
 //Default value?:
   
   /** Sets the selection mode of the @a icon_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param mode The selection mode.
    */
   void set_selection_mode(SelectionMode mode);
   
   /** Gets the selection mode of the @a icon_view.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The current selection mode.
    */
   SelectionMode get_selection_mode() const;
   
   /** Selects the row at @a path.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be selected.
    */
   void select_path(const TreeModel::Path& path);
   
   /** Unselects the row at @a path.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be unselected.
    */
@@ -545,8 +471,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns <tt>true</tt> if the icon pointed to by @a path is currently
    * selected. If @a path does not point to a valid location, <tt>false</tt> is returned.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath to check selection on.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a path is selected.
    */
@@ -580,8 +504,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return A List containing a Gtk::TreePath for each selected row.
    */
   ArrayHandle_TreePaths get_selected_items() const;
@@ -589,20 +511,14 @@ public:
   
   /** Selects all the icons. @a icon_view must has its selection mode set
    * to Gtk::SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void select_all();
   
   /** Unselects all the icons.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    */
   void unselect_all();
   
   /** Activates the item determined by @a path.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param path The Gtk::TreePath to be activated.
    */
@@ -620,8 +536,6 @@ public:
    * (icon_view)</tt> in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.  
    * Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath.
    * @param cell One of the cell renderers of @a icon_view, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param start_editing <tt>true</tt> if the specified cell should start being edited.
@@ -635,8 +549,6 @@ public:
    * @param path The current cursor path.
    * @param cell The current focus cell.
    * @result true if the cursor is set.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   bool get_cursor(TreeModel::Path& path, CellRenderer*& cell) const;
 
@@ -646,8 +558,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @param path The current cursor path.
    * @result true if the cursor is set.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   bool get_cursor(TreeModel::Path& path) const;
 
@@ -657,8 +567,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @param cell The current focus cell.
    * @result true if the cursor is set.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   bool get_cursor(CellRenderer*& cell) const;
   
@@ -678,8 +586,6 @@ public:
    * the model. If the model changes before the @a icon_view is realized, the 
    * centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param path The path of the item to move to.
    * @param use_align Whether to use alignment arguments, or <tt>false</tt>.
    * @param row_align The vertical alignment of the item specified by @a path.
@@ -710,15 +616,11 @@ public:
 
   /** Undoes the effect of enable_model_drag_source(). Calling this
    * method sets Gtk::IconView::property_reorderable() to <tt>false</tt>.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   void unset_model_drag_source();
   
   /** Undoes the effect of enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
    * method sets Gtk::IconView::property_reorderable() to <tt>false</tt>.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   void unset_model_drag_dest();
 
@@ -736,8 +638,6 @@ public:
    * reordering is allowed.  If more control is needed, you should probably
    * handle drag and drop manually.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param reorderable <tt>true</tt>, if the list of items can be reordered.
    */
   void set_reorderable(bool reorderable =  true);
@@ -745,8 +645,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop. 
    * See set_reorderable().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the list can be reordered.
    */
   bool get_reorderable() const;
@@ -756,8 +654,6 @@ public:
   //TODO: Discover what arguments are output arguments:
   
   /** Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @param path The path of the item to highlight, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param pos Specifies where to drop, relative to the item.
@@ -768,24 +664,18 @@ public:
    *
    * @param path The highlighted item.
    * @pos The drop position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void get_drag_dest_item(TreeModel::Path& path, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const;
 
   /** Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
    *
    * @param path The highlighted item.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void get_drag_dest_item(TreeModel::Path& path) const;
 
   /** Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
    *
    * @pos The drop position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void get_drag_dest_item(IconViewDropPosition& pos) const;
   
@@ -797,8 +687,6 @@ public:
    * @param path The path of the item.
    * @param pos: The drop position.
    * @result whether there is an item at the given position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, TreeModel::Path& path, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const;
 
@@ -808,8 +696,6 @@ public:
    * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination item for.
    * @param path The path of the item.
    * @result whether there is an item at the given position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, TreeModel::Path& path) const;
 
@@ -819,8 +705,6 @@ public:
    * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination item for.
    * @param pos: The drop position.
    * @result whether there is an item at the given position.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   bool get_dest_item_at_pos(int drag_x, int drag_y, IconViewDropPosition& pos) const;
   
@@ -828,8 +712,6 @@ public:
   /** Creates a Gdk::Pixmap representation of the item at @a path.
    * This image is used for a drag icon.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath in @a icon_view.
    * @return A newly-allocated pixmap of the drag icon.
    */
@@ -839,8 +721,6 @@ public:
   /** Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window,
    * as expected by e.g.\ get_path_at_pos(). 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget.
    * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget.
    * @param bx Return location for bin_window X coordinate.
@@ -852,8 +732,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @a path.
    * See also Tooltip::set_tip_area().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip.
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath.
    */
@@ -862,8 +740,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to the area which @a cell occupies in
    * the item pointed to by @a path. See also Tooltip::set_tip_area().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip.
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath.
    * @param cell A Gtk::CellRenderer.
@@ -872,8 +748,6 @@ public:
 
   /** Sets the tip area of @a tooltip to the area occupied by
    * the item pointed to by @a path. See also Tooltip::set_tip_area().
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * @param tooltip A Gtk::Tooltip.
    * @param path A Gtk::TreePath.
    */
@@ -899,8 +773,6 @@ public:
    * to be relative to IconView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false.
    *
    * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   bool get_tooltip_context_path(int& x, int& y,
                                 bool keyboard_tip,
@@ -925,8 +797,6 @@ public:
    * to be relative to IconView's bin_window if keyboard_tooltip is false.
    *
    * Return value: whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,12}
    */
   bool get_tooltip_context_iter(int& x, int& y,
                                 bool keyboard_tip,
@@ -941,8 +811,6 @@ public:
    * When enabled, Gtk::Widget::signal_has_tooltip() will be set to <tt>true</tt> and
    *  @a icon_view will connect a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip() signal handler.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param column An integer, which is a valid column number for @a icon_view's model.
    */
   void set_tooltip_column(int column);
@@ -950,8 +818,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the column of @a icon_view's model which is being used for
    * displaying tooltips on @a icon_view's rows.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The index of the tooltip column that is currently being
    * used, or -1 if this is disabled.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/image.h

@@ -210,8 +210,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @param icon_set An IconSet
    * @param size A stock icon size.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
     explicit Image(const IconSet& icon_set, IconSize icon_size);
 
@@ -304,8 +302,6 @@ public:
   void set(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::PixbufAnimation>& animation);
   
   /** See new_from_gicon() for details.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @param icon An icon.
    * @param size An icon size.
@@ -318,8 +314,6 @@ public:
    * displayed instead.  If the current icon theme is changed, the icon
    * will be updated appropriately.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param icon_name An icon name.
    * @param size A stock icon size.
    */
@@ -327,8 +321,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Resets the image to be empty.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    */
   void clear();
 
@@ -395,8 +387,6 @@ public:
   * IMAGE_GICON (see get_storage_type()).
   *
   * @param icon_size A place to store an icon size.
-  * 
-  * @newin{2,14}
   */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gio::Icon> get_gicon(Gtk::IconSize& icon_size);
 
@@ -405,8 +395,6 @@ public:
   * IMAGE_GICON (see get_storage_type()).
   *
   * @param icon_size A place to store an icon size.
-  * 
-  * @newin{2,14}
   */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gio::Icon> get_gicon(Gtk::IconSize& icon_size) const;
   
@@ -416,8 +404,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The pixel size used for named icons.
    */
@@ -427,8 +413,6 @@ public:
    * to a value != -1, it is used instead of the icon size set by
    * set_from_icon_name().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param pixel_size The new pixel size.
    */
   void set_pixel_size(int pixel_size);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/imagemenuitem.h

@@ -122,8 +122,6 @@ public:
    * Use this property if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use
    * without the image. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param always_show <tt>true</tt> if the menuitem should always show the image.
    */
   void set_always_show_image(bool always_show =  true);
@@ -131,8 +129,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the menu item will ignore the Gtk::Settings::property_gtk_menu_images()
    * setting and always show the image, if available.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the menu item will always show the image.
    */
   bool get_always_show_image() const;
@@ -164,8 +160,6 @@ public:
   /** If <tt>true</tt>, the label set in the menuitem is used as a
    * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param use_stock <tt>true</tt> if the menuitem should use a stock item.
    */
   void set_use_stock(bool use_stock =  true);
@@ -173,8 +167,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether the label set in the menuitem is used as a
    * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the label set in the menuitem is used as a
    * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
    */
@@ -188,8 +180,6 @@ public:
    * If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
    * you shouldnt need this (see new_from_stock()).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param accel_group The Gtk::AccelGroup.
    */
   void set_accel_group(const Glib::RefPtr<AccelGroup>& accel_group);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/infobar.h

@@ -61,8 +61,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * The InfoBar widget looks like
  * @image html infobar1.png
  *
- * @newin{2,18}
- *
  * @ingroup Widgets
  */
 
@@ -130,16 +128,12 @@ public:
 //TODO: What types are these widgets really?
   
   /** Returns the action area of @a info_bar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The action area.
    */
   Widget* get_action_area();
   
   /** Returns the action area of @a info_bar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The action area.
    */
@@ -147,16 +141,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the content area of @a info_bar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The content area.
    */
   Widget* get_content_area();
   
   /** Returns the content area of @a info_bar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The content area.
    */
@@ -168,8 +158,6 @@ public:
    * signal on the message area when the widget is activated. The widget
    * is appended to the end of the message areas action area.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param child An activatable widget.
    * @param response_id Response ID for @a child.
    */
@@ -182,8 +170,6 @@ public:
    * to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
    * returned, but usually you don't need it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param button_text Text of button, or stock ID.
    * @param response_id Response ID for the button.
    * @return The button widget that was added.
@@ -196,8 +182,6 @@ public:
    * to the end of the info bars's action area. The button widget is
    * returned, but usually you don't need it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param button_text Text of button, or stock ID.
    * @param response_id Response ID for the button.
    * @return The button widget that was added.
@@ -209,8 +193,6 @@ public:
    * widget in the info bars's action area with the given response_id.
    * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param response_id A response ID.
    * @param setting <tt>true</tt> for sensitive.
    */
@@ -223,16 +205,12 @@ public:
    * Note that this function currently requires @a info_bar to
    * be added to a widget hierarchy. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param response_id A response ID.
    */
   void set_default_response(int response_id);
 
   
   /** Emits the 'response' signal with the given @a response_id.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @param response_id A response ID.
    */
@@ -243,15 +221,11 @@ public:
    * GTK+ uses this type to determine what color to use
    * when drawing the message area.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param message_type A Gtk::MessageType.
    */
   void set_message_type(MessageType message_type);
   
   /** Returns the message type of the message area.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return The message type of the message area.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/invisible.h

@@ -107,24 +107,18 @@ public:
 
  
   /** Returns the Gdk::Screen object associated with @a invisible
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The associated Gdk::Screen.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Screen> get_screen();
   
   /** Returns the Gdk::Screen object associated with @a invisible
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The associated Gdk::Screen.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Screen> get_screen() const;
   
   /** Sets the Gdk::Screen where the Gtk::Invisible object will be displayed.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/label.h

@@ -329,15 +329,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text 
    * if there is not enough space to render the entire string.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param mode A Pango::EllipsizeMode.
    */
   void set_ellipsize(Pango::EllipsizeMode mode);
   
   /** Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See set_ellipsize().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return Pango::EllipsizeMode.
    */
@@ -345,8 +341,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Sets the desired width in characters of @a label to @a n_chars.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param n_chars The new desired width, in characters.
    */
@@ -355,16 +349,12 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the desired width of @a label, in characters. See
    * set_width_chars().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The width of the label in characters.
    */
   int get_width_chars() const;
 
   
   /** Sets the desired maximum width in characters of @a label to @a n_chars.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param n_chars The new desired maximum width, in characters.
    */
@@ -373,8 +363,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the desired maximum width of @a label, in characters. See
    * set_width_chars().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The maximum width of the label in characters.
    */
   int get_max_width_chars() const;
@@ -407,15 +395,11 @@ public:
    * the line wrapping is done. The default is Pango::WRAP_WORD which means
    * wrap on word boundaries.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param wrap_mode The line wrapping mode.
    */
   void set_line_wrap_mode(Pango::WrapMode wrap_mode);
   
   /** Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See set_line_wrap_mode().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
    */
@@ -439,8 +423,6 @@ public:
    * setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
    * wrapped, or ellipsized.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param angle The angle that the baseline of the label makes with
    * the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise.
    */
@@ -449,8 +431,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the angle of rotation for the label. See
    * set_angle().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return The angle of rotation for the label.
    */
   double get_angle() const;
@@ -517,16 +497,12 @@ public:
   
   
   /** Sets whether the label is in single line mode.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @param single_line_mode <tt>true</tt> if the label should be in single line mode.
    */
   void set_single_line_mode(bool single_line_mode =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> when the label is in single line mode.
    */
@@ -541,8 +517,6 @@ public:
    * This function is intended for use in a Gtk::Label::signal_activate_link() handler
    * or for use in a Gtk::Widget::signal_query_tooltip() handler.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return The currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
    * not be freed or modified.
    */
@@ -552,8 +526,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the label should keep track of clicked
    * links (and use a different color for them).
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param track_links <tt>true</tt> to track visited links.
    */
   void set_track_visited_links(bool track_links =  true);
@@ -561,8 +533,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
    * of clicked links.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if clicked links are remembered.
    */
   bool get_track_visited_links() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/layout.h

@@ -124,16 +124,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_bin_window();
   
   /** Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return A Gdk::Window.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/linkbutton.h

@@ -54,8 +54,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  *
  * The LinkButton widget looks like this:
  * @image html linkbutton1.png
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  * @ingroup Widgets
  */
 
@@ -121,8 +119,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Retrieves the URI set using set_uri().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A valid URI.  The returned string is owned by the link button
    * and should not be modified or freed.
@@ -132,8 +128,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets @a uri as the URI where the Gtk::LinkButton points. As a side-effect
    * this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri A valid URI.
    */
   void set_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri);
@@ -145,8 +139,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * The state may also be changed using set_visited().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the link has been visited, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool get_visited() const;
@@ -154,8 +146,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the 'visited' state of the URI where the Gtk::LinkButton
    * points.  See get_visited() for more details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @param visited The new 'visited' state.
    */
   void set_visited(bool visited =  true);
@@ -175,8 +165,6 @@ public:
    * This function is called before every signal handler registered for the "clicked" signal.
    *
    * @param slot A function called each time a LinkButton is clicked.
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   *
    * @deprecated Use Button::signal_clicked()  instead.
    */
   static void set_uri_hook(const SlotUri& slot);
@@ -184,8 +172,6 @@ public:
 
   /** Unsets any previously set slot as the function that should be invoked every time a user clicks a LinkButton. 
    * @see set_uri_hook().
-   * @newin{2,
-   *
    * @deprecated Use  Button::signal_clicked() instead.
    */
   static void unset_uri_hook();

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/liststore.h

@@ -186,8 +186,6 @@ public:
   /** Swaps @a a and @a b in @a store. Note that this function only works with
    * unsorted stores.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param a A Gtk::TreeIter.
    * @param b Another Gtk::TreeIter.
    */
@@ -216,8 +214,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this Gtk::ListStore.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param iter A Gtk::TreeIter.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the iter is valid, <tt>false</tt> if the iter is invalid.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/listviewtext.h

@@ -35,8 +35,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * @ingroup Widgets
  * @ingroup Containers
  * @ingroup TreeView
- *
- * @newin{2,10}
  */
 class ListViewText : public Gtk::TreeView
 {

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menu.h

@@ -225,8 +225,6 @@ public:
   void set_accel_path(const Glib::ustring& accel_path);
   
   /** Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The accelerator path set on the menu.
    */
@@ -277,8 +275,6 @@ public:
   Glib::ustring get_title() const;
   
   /** Sets the Gdk::Screen on which the menu will be displayed.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen, or <tt>0</tt> if the screen should be
    * determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
@@ -294,8 +290,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * Note that this function is not related to detach().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param child A Gtk::MenuItem.
    * @param left_attach The column number to attach the left side of the item to.
    * @param right_attach The column number to attach the right side of the item to.
@@ -314,16 +308,12 @@ public:
    * by a Gtk::MenuPositionFunc, since, for very long menus, these coordinates 
    * may extend beyond the monitor boundaries or even the screen boundaries. 
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param monitor_num The number of the monitor on which the menu should
    * be popped up.
    */
   void set_monitor(int monitor_num);
   
   /** Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The number of the monitor on which the menu should
    * be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set.
@@ -336,8 +326,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles 
    * or icons, regardless of their actual presence.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param reserve_toggle_size Whether to reserve size for toggles.
    */
   void set_reserve_toggle_size(bool reserve_toggle_size =  true);
@@ -345,8 +333,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether the menu reserves space for toggles and
    * icons, regardless of their actual presence.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @return Whether the menu reserves toggle space.
    */
   bool get_reserve_toggle_size() const;
@@ -476,8 +462,6 @@ protected:
   /** Attaches the menu to the widget.
    * 
    * param @attach_widget: the Widget that the menu will be attached to.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void attach_to_widget(Widget& attach_widget);
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menubar.h

@@ -152,15 +152,11 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar. 
    * See set_pack_direction().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return The pack direction.
    */
   PackDirection get_pack_direction() const;
   
   /** Sets how items should be packed inside a menubar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @param pack_dir A new Gtk::PackDirection.
    */
@@ -169,15 +165,11 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
    * See set_child_pack_direction().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @return The child pack direction.
    */
   PackDirection get_child_pack_direction() const;
   
   /** Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @param child_pack_dir A new Gtk::PackDirection.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menuitem.h

@@ -137,7 +137,6 @@ public:
   void set_submenu(Menu& submenu);
 
   /** Remove the menu item's sub-menu.
-   * @newin{2,22}
    */
   void unset_submenu();
 
@@ -224,24 +223,18 @@ public:
    * 
    * See set_accel_path() for details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The accelerator path corresponding to this menu item's
    * functionality, or <tt>0</tt> if not set.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_accel_path() const;
   
   /** Sets @a text on the @a menu_item label
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param label The text you want to set.
    */
   void set_label(const Glib::ustring& label);
   
   /** Sets @a text on the @a menu_item label
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The text in the @a menu_item label. This is the internal
    * string used by the label, and must not be modified.
@@ -251,8 +244,6 @@ public:
   /** If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
    * used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param setting <tt>true</tt> if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.
    */
   void set_use_underline(bool setting =  true);
@@ -260,8 +251,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
    * used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if an embedded underline in the label indicates
    * the mnemonic accelerator key.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menushell.h

@@ -198,8 +198,6 @@ public:
    * don't select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff
    * item.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
-   * 
    * @param search_sensitive If <tt>true</tt>, search for the first selectable
    * menu item, otherwise select nothing if
    * the first item isn't sensitive. This
@@ -211,8 +209,6 @@ public:
   void deactivate();
   
   /** Cancels the selection within the menu shell.  
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   void cancel();
 
@@ -289,8 +285,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns <tt>true</tt> if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
    */
@@ -322,8 +316,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also gdk_keyboard_grab()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param take_focus <tt>true</tt> if the menu shell should take the keyboard focus on popup.
    */
   void set_take_focus(bool take_focus =  true);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/menutoolbutton.h

@@ -142,15 +142,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the Gtk::Menu that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow.
    * If @a menu is <tt>0</tt>, the arrow button becomes insensitive.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param menu The Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton.
    */
   void set_menu(Menu& menu);
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Menu associated
    * with Gtk::MenuToolButton.
@@ -158,8 +154,6 @@ public:
   Menu* get_menu();
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::Menu associated with Gtk::MenuToolButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return The Gtk::Menu associated
    * with Gtk::MenuToolButton.
@@ -173,8 +167,6 @@ public:
    * pops up the menu. See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting
    * a tooltip on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.12: Use set_arrow_tooltip_text()
    * instead.
    * 
@@ -192,8 +184,6 @@ public:
    * pops up the menu.  See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting a tooltip
    * on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param text Text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button.
    */
   void set_arrow_tooltip_text(const Glib::ustring& text);
@@ -202,8 +192,6 @@ public:
    * which pops up the menu.  See Gtk::ToolItem::set_tooltip() for setting a
    * tooltip on the whole Gtk::MenuToolButton.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param markup Markup text to be used as tooltip text for button's arrow button.
    */
   void set_arrow_tooltip_markup(const Glib::ustring& markup);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/messagedialog.h

@@ -157,24 +157,18 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Sets the dialog's image to @a image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param image The image.
    */
   void set_image(Widget& image);
   
   /** Gets the dialog's image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The dialog's image.
    */
   Widget* get_image();
   
   /** Gets the dialog's image.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The dialog's image.
    */
@@ -187,8 +181,6 @@ public:
    * up with the Pango text markup
    * language.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @deprecated Use set_message(string, true).
    * 
    * @param str Markup string (see Pango markup format).
@@ -208,8 +200,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the secondary text of the message dialog.
    * Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
    *
-   * @newin{2,6}.
-   *
    * @param text The message.
    * @param use_markup Whether @a message contains pango markup.
    */
@@ -223,8 +213,6 @@ public:
    * languages).  See Gtk::Dialog::get_content_area() for the corresponding
    * function in the parent Gtk::Dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::VBox corresponding to the
    * "message area" in the @a message_dialog.
    */
@@ -237,8 +225,6 @@ public:
    * languages).  See Gtk::Dialog::get_content_area() for the corresponding
    * function in the parent Gtk::Dialog.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::VBox corresponding to the
    * "message area" in the @a message_dialog.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/notebook.h

@@ -535,8 +535,6 @@ public:
    * the same group identificator will be able to exchange tabs
    * via drag and drop. A notebook with group identificator -1 will
    * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * Deprecated: 2.12: use set_group_name() instead.
    * 
    * @param group_id A group identificator, or -1 to unset it.
@@ -548,8 +546,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the current group identificator for @a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * Deprecated: 2.12: use get_group_name() instead.
    * 
    * @return The group identificator, or -1 if none is set.
@@ -567,8 +563,6 @@ public:
    * via drag and drop. A notebook with a <tt>0</tt> group identificator will
    * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use set_group_name() instead
    * 
    * @param group A pointer to identify the notebook group, or <tt>0</tt> to unset it.
@@ -580,8 +574,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the current group identificator pointer for @a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_group_name() instead
    * 
@@ -595,8 +587,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the current group identificator pointer for @a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.24: Use get_group_name() instead
    * 
@@ -613,8 +603,6 @@ public:
    * via drag and drop. A notebook with a <tt>0</tt> group name will
    * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
-   * 
    * @param name The name of the notebook group, or <tt>0</tt> to unset it.
    */
   void set_group_name(const Glib::ustring& group_name);
@@ -627,8 +615,6 @@ public:
    * 
    *  Return Value: (transfer none): the group name,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if none is set.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,24}
    */
   Glib::ustring get_group_name() const;
   
@@ -662,8 +648,6 @@ public:
 #ifndef GTKMM_DISABLE_DEPRECATED
 
   /** Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @deprecated Use the const method.
    * 
@@ -674,8 +658,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @return The number of pages in the notebook.
    */
@@ -793,16 +775,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return Horizontal width of a tab border.
    */
   guint16 get_tab_hborder() const;
   
   /** Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,22}
    * 
    * @return Vertical width of a tab border.
    */
@@ -944,8 +922,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param child A child Gtk::Widget.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the tab is reorderable.
@@ -955,16 +931,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether the notebook tab can be reordered
    * via drag and drop or not.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param child A child Gtk::Widget.
    * @param reorderable Whether the tab is reorderable or not.
    */
   void set_tab_reorderable(Widget& child, bool reorderable =  true);
   
   /** Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @a notebook.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param child A child Gtk::Widget.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the tab is detachable.
@@ -989,8 +961,6 @@ public:
    * If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
    * you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param child A child Gtk::Widget.
    * @param detachable Whether the tab is detachable or not.
    */
@@ -998,8 +968,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets one of the action widgets. See set_action_widget().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
    * 
    * @param pack_type Pack type of the action widget to receive.
    * @return The action widget with the given @a pack_type
@@ -1014,8 +982,6 @@ public:
    * Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
    * not included in the list returned from Gtk::Container::foreach().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param widget A Gtk::Widget.
    * @param pack_type Pack type of the action widget.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/offscreenwindow.h

@@ -62,8 +62,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  *
  * When contained offscreen widgets are redrawn, OffscreenWindow
  * will emit a "damage-event" signal.
- *
- * @newin{2,20}
  * @ingroup Containers
  * @ingroup Widgets
  */
@@ -131,8 +129,6 @@ public:
    * a Gdk::Pixmap.  If you need to keep this around over window
    * resizes then you should add a reference to it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap,
    * or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -142,8 +138,6 @@ public:
    * a Gdk::Pixmap.  If you need to keep this around over window
    * resizes then you should add a reference to it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixmap pointer to the offscreen pixmap,
    * or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -155,8 +149,6 @@ public:
    * and the application should unreference it once it is no longer
    * needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf pointer, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_pixbuf();
@@ -166,8 +158,6 @@ public:
    * and the application should unreference it once it is no longer
    * needed.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf pointer, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Pixbuf> get_pixbuf() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/orientable.h

@@ -57,8 +57,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * subclasses of a common base class (e.g GtkBox/GtkHBox/GtkVBox and 
  * GtkScale/GtkHScale/GtkVScale). GtkOrientable is more flexible in that it 
  * allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets to 'flip'.
- *
- * @newin{2,16}
  */
 
 class Orientable : public Glib::Interface
@@ -130,16 +128,12 @@ private:
 public:
   
   /** Sets the orientation of the @a orientable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @param orientation The orientable's new orientation.
    */
   void set_orientation(Orientation orientation);
   
   /** Retrieves the orientation of the @a orientable.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The orientation of the @a orientable.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/paned.h

@@ -176,16 +176,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return First child, or <tt>0</tt> if it is not set.
    */
   Widget* get_child1();
   
   /** Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return First child, or <tt>0</tt> if it is not set.
    */
@@ -193,16 +189,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Second child, or <tt>0</tt> if it is not set.
    */
   Widget* get_child2();
   
   /** Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return Second child, or <tt>0</tt> if it is not set.
    */
@@ -214,8 +206,6 @@ public:
    * enables the callback to distinguish between the window
    * of the paned, a child and the handle.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return The paned's handle window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_handle_window();
@@ -225,8 +215,6 @@ public:
    * enables the callback to distinguish between the window
    * of the paned, a child and the handle.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return The paned's handle window.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_handle_window() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/plug.h

@@ -119,8 +119,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the plug is embedded in a socket.
    */
@@ -128,16 +126,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The window of the socket, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_socket_window();
   
   /** Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The window of the socket, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/progressbar.h

@@ -236,8 +236,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the text 
    * if there is not enough space to render the entire string.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param mode A Pango::EllipsizeMode.
    */
   void set_ellipsize(Pango::EllipsizeMode mode);
@@ -245,8 +243,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns the ellipsizing position of the progressbar. 
    * See set_ellipsize().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @return Pango::EllipsizeMode.
    */
   Pango::EllipsizeMode get_ellipsize() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radioaction.h

@@ -189,8 +189,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * [C example ellipted]
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The list representing the radio group for this object.
    */
   Group get_group();
@@ -200,8 +198,6 @@ public:
   /** Obtains the value property of the currently active member of 
    * the group to which @a action belongs.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The value of the currently active group member.
    */
   int get_current_value() const;
@@ -209,8 +205,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the currently active group member to the member with value
    * property @a current_value.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param current_value The new value.
    */
   void set_current_value(int current_value);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/radiotoolbutton.h

@@ -114,8 +114,6 @@ public:
    * The RadioToolButton will have an empty label and will reside in an newly created Group.
    * Use get_group() to retrieve this group and pass it to other radio buttons to assign
    * them to this group.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   RadioToolButton();
   
@@ -126,8 +124,6 @@ public:
    *
    * @param group The existing group which will be used for this RadioButton.
    * @param label The string used to display the label for this RadioToolButton.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   explicit RadioToolButton(Group& group, const Glib::ustring& label = Glib::ustring());
   
@@ -139,8 +135,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * @param group The existing group which will be used for this RadioButton.
    * @param stock_id The StockID which determines the look of the RadioToolButton.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   RadioToolButton(Group& group, const Gtk::StockID& stock_id);
   
@@ -160,23 +154,17 @@ public:
    *
    * @param icon_widget The widget placed as the RadioToolButton's icon.
    * @param label The string used to display the label for this RadioToolButton.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   explicit RadioToolButton(Widget& icon_widget, const Glib::ustring& label = Glib::ustring());
 
   
   /** Returns the radio button group @a button belongs to.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @return The group @a button belongs to.
    */
   Group get_group();
   
   /** Adds @a button to @a group, removing it from the group it belonged to before.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
    * 
    * @param group An existing radio button group.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/range.h

@@ -199,15 +199,11 @@ public:
    * 
    * See Gtk::Widget::get_direction().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
-   * 
    * @param flippable <tt>true</tt> to make the range flippable.
    */
   void set_flippable(bool flippable =  true);
   
   /** Gets the value set by set_flippable().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,18}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the range is flippable.
    */
@@ -219,8 +215,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param size_fixed <tt>true</tt> to make the slider size constant.
    */
   void set_slider_size_fixed(bool size_fixed =  true);
@@ -229,8 +223,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See set_slider_size_fixed().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return Whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
    */
   bool get_slider_size_fixed() const;
@@ -240,8 +232,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param min_size The slider's minimum size.
    */
   void set_min_slider_size(bool min_size =  true);
@@ -250,8 +240,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See set_min_slider_size().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @return The minimum size of the range's slider.
    */
   int get_min_slider_size() const;
@@ -262,8 +250,6 @@ public:
    * This method is useful mainly for Range subclasses.
    *
    * @result The range rectangle.
-   *
-   * @@newin{2,20}
    */
   Gdk::Rectangle get_range_rect() const;
   
@@ -273,8 +259,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * This function is useful mainly for Gtk::Range subclasses.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,20}
-   * 
    * @param slider_start Return location for the slider's start, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param slider_end Return location for the slider's end, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -284,8 +268,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
    * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param sensitivity The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
    */
   void set_lower_stepper_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity);
@@ -293,8 +275,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
    * 'lower' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The lower stepper's sensitivity policy.
    */
   SensitivityType get_lower_stepper_sensitivity() const;
@@ -302,8 +282,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
    * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param sensitivity The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
    */
   void set_upper_stepper_sensitivity(SensitivityType sensitivity);
@@ -311,8 +289,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
    * 'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
    */
   SensitivityType get_upper_stepper_sensitivity() const;
@@ -357,15 +333,11 @@ public:
    * set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill
    * level concept.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param show_fill_level Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.
    */
   void set_show_fill_level(bool show_fill_level =  true);
   
   /** Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a range shows the fill level.
    */
@@ -375,15 +347,11 @@ public:
    * set_fill_level() for a general description of the fill
    * level concept.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param restrict_to_fill_level Whether the fill level restricts slider movement.
    */
   void set_restrict_to_fill_level(bool restrict_to_fill_level =  true);
   
   /** Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a range is restricted to the fill level.
    */
@@ -407,15 +375,11 @@ public:
    * by set_restrict_to_fill_level() and is by default
    * enabled.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param fill_level The new position of the fill level indicator.
    */
   void set_fill_level(double fill_level);
   
   /** Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return The current fill level.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/rc.h

@@ -281,8 +281,6 @@ public:
    * with Gtk::Widget::set_style().
    *
    * @param settings a Gtk::Settings
-   *
-   * @newin{2,4}
    */
   static void reset_styles(const Glib::RefPtr<Settings>& settings);
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentaction.h

@@ -58,8 +58,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  *
  * See also the methods in the RecentChooser base class.
  *
- * @newin{2,12}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 
@@ -145,8 +143,6 @@ public:
 
 
   /** Returns the value set by Gtk::RecentChooserMenu::set_show_numbers().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if numbers should be shown.
    */
@@ -157,8 +153,6 @@ public:
    * a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's
    * label. Only the first ten items get a number to avoid clashes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param show_numbers <tt>true</tt> if the shown items should be numbered.
    */
   void set_show_numbers(bool show_numbers =  true);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooser.h

@@ -141,8 +141,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * that implement this interface are RecentChooserWidget, RecentChooserDialog
  * and RecentChooserMenu.
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 
@@ -215,8 +213,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param show_private <tt>true</tt> to show private items, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -225,8 +221,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether @a chooser should display recently used resources
    * registered as private.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the recent chooser should show private items,
    * <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -235,8 +229,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether @a chooser should display the recently used resources that
    * it didn't find.  This only applies to local resources.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param show_not_found Whether to show the local items we didn't find.
    */
   void set_show_not_found(bool show_not_found =  true);
@@ -244,24 +236,18 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves whether @a chooser should show the recently used resources that
    * were not found.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the resources not found should be displayed, and
    * <tt>false</tt> otheriwse.
    */
   bool get_show_not_found() const;
   
   /** Sets whether @a chooser can select multiple items.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param select_multiple <tt>true</tt> if @a chooser can select more than one item.
    */
   void set_select_multiple(bool select_multiple =  true);
   
   /** Gets whether @a chooser can select multiple items.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a chooser can select more than one item.
    */
@@ -270,8 +256,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets the number of items that should be returned by
    * get_items() and get_uris().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param limit A positive integer, or -1 for all items.
    */
   void set_limit(int limit);
@@ -280,8 +264,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the number of items returned by get_items()
    * and get_uris().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
    * returned.
    */
@@ -292,8 +274,6 @@ public:
    *  @a local_only is <tt>true</tt> (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
    * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param local_only <tt>true</tt> if only local files can be shown.
    */
   void set_local_only(bool local_only =  true);
@@ -301,8 +281,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
    * resources selector.  See set_local_only()
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if only local resources should be shown.
    */
   bool get_local_only() const;
@@ -310,8 +288,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
    * recently used resource in a Gtk::RecentChooser widget.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param show_tips <tt>true</tt> if tooltips should be shown.
    */
   void set_show_tips(bool show_tips =  true);
@@ -319,8 +295,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets whether @a chooser should display tooltips containing the full path
    * of a recently user resource.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the recent chooser should show tooltips,
    * <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -332,15 +306,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether @a chooser should show an icon near the resource when
    * displaying it.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param show_icons Whether to show an icon near the resource.
    */
   void set_show_icons(bool show_icons =  true);
   
   /** Retrieves whether @a chooser should show an icon near the resource.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the icons should be displayed, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -349,15 +319,11 @@ public:
   /** Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
    *  @a chooser.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param sort_type Sort order that the chooser should use.
    */
   void set_sort_type(RecentSortType sort_type);
   
   /** Gets the value set by set_sort_type().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The sorting order of the @a chooser.
    */
@@ -380,8 +346,6 @@ public:
   // throwing RecentChooserError instead
   
   /** Sets @a uri as the current URI for @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the URI was found.
@@ -389,16 +353,12 @@ public:
   bool set_current_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri);
   
   /** Gets the URI currently selected by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A newly allocated string holding a URI.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_current_uri() const;
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentInfo currently selected by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo.  Use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() when
    * when you have finished using it.
@@ -406,8 +366,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<RecentInfo> get_current_item();
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentInfo currently selected by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo.  Use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() when
    * when you have finished using it.
@@ -416,8 +374,6 @@ public:
   // TODO: Same here
   
   /** Selects @a uri inside @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a uri was found.
@@ -425,8 +381,6 @@ public:
   bool select_uri(const Glib::ustring& uri);
   
   /** Unselects @a uri inside @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    */
@@ -434,14 +388,10 @@ public:
   
   /** Selects all the items inside @a chooser, if the @a chooser supports
    * multiple selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void select_all();
   
   /** Unselects all the items inside @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void unselect_all();
 
@@ -453,8 +403,6 @@ public:
    * The return value of this function is affected by the "sort-type" and
    * "limit" properties of @a chooser.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A newly allocated
    * list of Gtk::RecentInfo objects.  You should
    * use Gtk::RecentInfo::unref() on every item of the list, and then free
@@ -475,23 +423,17 @@ public:
    * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
    * set_filter().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter.
    */
   void add_filter(const RecentFilter& filter);
   
   /** Removes @a filter from the list of Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter.
    */
   void remove_filter(const RecentFilter& filter);
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A singly linked list
    * of Gtk::RecentFilter objects.  You
@@ -500,8 +442,6 @@ public:
   Glib::SListHandle<RecentFilter*> list_filters();
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter objects held by @a chooser.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A singly linked list
    * of Gtk::RecentFilter objects.  You
@@ -512,8 +452,6 @@ public:
   /** Sets @a filter as the current Gtk::RecentFilter object used by @a chooser
    * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param filter A Gtk::RecentFilter.
    */
   void set_filter(const RecentFilter& filter);
@@ -521,8 +459,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter object currently used by @a chooser to affect
    * the display of the recently used resources.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::RecentFilter object.
    */
   RecentFilter* get_filter();
@@ -530,8 +466,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Gtk::RecentFilter object currently used by @a chooser to affect
    * the display of the recently used resources.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A Gtk::RecentFilter object.
    */
   const RecentFilter* get_filter() const;

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserdialog.h

@@ -53,8 +53,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * A RecentChooserDialog looks like this:
  * @image html recentchooserdialog1.png
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchoosermenu.h

@@ -50,8 +50,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * Note that RecentChooserMenu does not have any methods of its own. Instead,
  * you should use the functions that work on a RecentChooser.
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 
@@ -123,15 +121,11 @@ public:
    * be used inside ten menu item's label.  Only the first the items
    * get a number to avoid clashes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param show_numbers Whether to show numbers.
    */
   void set_show_numbers(bool show_numbers =  true);
   
   /** Returns the value set by set_show_numbers().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if numbers should be shown.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentchooserwidget.h

@@ -47,8 +47,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * Note that RecentChooserWidget does not have any methods of its own.
  * Instead, you should use the functions that work on a RecentChooser.
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentfilter.h

@@ -128,8 +128,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * see RecentChooser::add_filter(), but it is also possible to
  * manually use a filter on a file with filter().
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 
@@ -195,8 +193,6 @@ public:
    * that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
    * user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param name Then human readable name of @a filter.
    */
   void set_name(const Glib::ustring& name);
@@ -204,8 +200,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the human-readable name for the filter.
    * See set_name().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The name of the filter, or <tt>0</tt>.  The returned string
    * is owned by the filter object and should not be freed.
    */
@@ -213,8 +207,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on their registered MIME type.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param mime_type A MIME type.
    */
@@ -223,24 +215,18 @@ public:
   /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
    * display name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param pattern A file pattern.
    */
   void add_pattern(const Glib::ustring& pattern);
   
   /** Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported
    * by GdkPixbuf.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void add_pixbuf_formats();
   
   /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the application
    * that has registered them.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param application An application name.
    */
   void add_application(const Glib::ustring& application);
@@ -248,8 +234,6 @@ public:
   /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the group
    * to which they belong
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param group A group name.
    */
   void add_group(const Glib::ustring& group);
@@ -257,8 +241,6 @@ public:
   /** Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number
    * of days elapsed since they were last modified.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param days Number of days.
    */
   void add_age(int days);
@@ -303,8 +285,6 @@ public:
    * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
    * Gtk::RecentChooser.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return Bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
    * calling filter().
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentinfo.h

@@ -42,8 +42,6 @@ namespace Gtk
 /** Contains informations found when looking up an entry of the
  * recently used files list.
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 class RecentInfo
@@ -98,8 +96,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the URI of the resource.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The URI of the resource.  The returned string is
    * owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
@@ -109,16 +105,12 @@ public:
   /** Gets the name of the resource.  If none has been defined, the basename
    * of the resource is obtained.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The display name of the resource.  The returned string
    * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
    */
   Glib::ustring get_display_name() const;
   
   /** Gets the (short) description of the resource.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The description of the resource.  The returned string
    * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
@@ -126,8 +118,6 @@ public:
   Glib::ustring get_description() const;
   
   /** Gets the MIME type of the resource.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The MIME type of the resource.  The returned string
    * is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
@@ -138,8 +128,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
    * was added to the recently used resources list.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
    * the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
    */
@@ -148,8 +136,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
    * was last modified.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
    * the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
    */
@@ -158,8 +144,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
    * was last visited.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return The number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
    * the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
    */
@@ -170,8 +154,6 @@ public:
    * list that have this flag set to <tt>true</tt> should only be displayed by the
    * applications that have registered them.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the private flag was found, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
   bool get_private_hint() const;
@@ -183,8 +165,6 @@ public:
    * If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the
    * storage specification, they will be expanded.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param app_name The name of the application that has registered this item.
    * @param app_exec Return location for the string containing the command line.
    * @param count Return location for the number of times this item was registered.
@@ -201,8 +181,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param length Return location for the length of the returned list.
    * @return A newly allocated <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings.
@@ -215,15 +193,11 @@ public:
   /** Gets the name of the last application that have registered the
    * recently used resource represented by @a info.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return An application name.  Use Glib::free() to free it.
    */
   Glib::ustring last_application() const;
   
   /** Checks whether an application registered this resource using @a app_name.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param app_name A string containing an application name.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if an application with name @a app_name was found,
@@ -236,8 +210,6 @@ public:
    * array of returned group names will be <tt>0</tt> terminated, so length might
    * optionally be <tt>0</tt>.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param length Return location for the number of groups returned.
    * @return A newly allocated <tt>0</tt> terminated array of strings.
    * Use Glib::strfreev() to free it.
@@ -249,8 +221,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether @a group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
    * recently used item @a info.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param group_name Name of a group.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the group was found.
    */
@@ -258,8 +228,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the icon of size @a size associated to the resource MIME type.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param size The size of the icon in pixels.
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf containing the icon,
@@ -268,8 +236,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_icon(int size);
   
   /** Retrieves the icon of size @a size associated to the resource MIME type.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @param size The size of the icon in pixels.
    * @return A Gdk::Pixbuf containing the icon,
@@ -282,8 +248,6 @@ public:
    * menu or list.  For example, calling this function on an item that refers to
    * "file:///foo/bar.txt" will yield "bar.txt".
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding; free it with
    * Glib::free().
    */
@@ -293,8 +257,6 @@ public:
    * is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
    * it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of get_uri().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the
    * resource's URI or <tt>0</tt>. Use Glib::free() when done using it.
    */
@@ -304,8 +266,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
    * pointed by @a info.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
    * since the time this resource was last modified.
    */
@@ -314,8 +274,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the
    * scheme of its URI.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the resource is local.
    */
   bool is_local() const;
@@ -323,8 +281,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether the resource pointed by @a info still exists.  At
    * the moment this check is done only on resources pointing to local files.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the resource exists.
    */
   bool exists() const;
@@ -333,8 +289,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether two Gtk::RecentInfo structures point to the same
    * resource.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param info_b A Gtk::RecentInfo.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if both Gtk::RecentInfo structures point to se same
    * resource, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/recentmanager.h

@@ -124,8 +124,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * get_for_screen() and it will contain information about current
  * recent manager for that screen.
  *
- * @newin{2,10}
- *
  * @ingroup RecentFiles
  */
 
@@ -191,8 +189,6 @@ public:
    * in your application without caring about memory management. The
    * returned instance will be freed when you application terminates.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return A unique Gtk::RecentManager. Do not ref or unref it.
    */
   static Glib::RefPtr<RecentManager> get_default();
@@ -212,8 +208,6 @@ public:
    * not be used in newly written code. Calling this function is
    * equivalent to calling get_default().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    * @return A unique Gtk::RecentManager associated with the given
    * screen. This recent manager is associated to the with the screen
@@ -260,8 +254,6 @@ public:
    * track the user's currently configured recently used documents
    * storage.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.12: This function has been deprecated and should
    * not be used in newly written code. Calling this function has
    * no effect.
@@ -288,8 +280,6 @@ public:
   /** Removes a resource pointed by @a uri from the recently used resources
    * list handled by a recent manager.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI of the item you wish to remove.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the item pointed by @a uri has been successfully
    * removed by the recently used resources list, and <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
@@ -300,8 +290,6 @@ public:
    * returns a structure containing informations about the resource
    * like its MIME type, or its display name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo structure containing information
    * about the resource pointed by @a uri, or <tt>0</tt> if the URI was
@@ -314,8 +302,6 @@ public:
    * returns a structure containing informations about the resource
    * like its MIME type, or its display name.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    * @return A Gtk::RecentInfo structure containing information
    * about the resource pointed by @a uri, or <tt>0</tt> if the URI was
@@ -327,8 +313,6 @@ public:
   /** Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
    * with @a uri inside the recent manager.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri A URI.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the resource was found, <tt>false</tt> otherwise.
    */
@@ -339,8 +323,6 @@ public:
    * Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
    * by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param uri The URI of a recently used resource.
    * @param new_uri The new URI of the recently used resource, or <tt>0</tt> to
    * remove the item pointed by @a uri in the list.
@@ -352,8 +334,6 @@ public:
    * function should return.  If @a limit is set to -1, then return all the
    * items.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the
    * view (implementing Gtk::RecentChooser), and not by the model (the
    * Gtk::RecentManager). See Gtk::RecentChooser::property_limit().
@@ -365,8 +345,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the maximum number of items that the get_items()
    * function should return.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * Deprecated: 2.22: The length of the list should be managed by the
    * view (implementing Gtk::RecentChooser), and not by the model (the
    * Gtk::RecentManager). See Gtk::RecentChooser::property_limit().
@@ -379,8 +357,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Gets the list of recently used resources.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A list of
    * newly allocated Gtk::RecentInfo objects. Use
@@ -391,8 +367,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return The number of items that have been removed from the
    * recently used resources list.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scale.h

@@ -172,8 +172,6 @@ public:
    * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by
    * the caller.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The Pango::Layout for this scale,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is <tt>false</tt>.
    */
@@ -183,8 +181,6 @@ public:
    * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by
    * the caller.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return The Pango::Layout for this scale,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is <tt>false</tt>.
    */
@@ -198,8 +194,6 @@ public:
    * If the Gtk::Scale::property_draw_value() property is <tt>false</tt>, the return 
    * values are undefined.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param x Location to store X offset of layout, or <tt>0</tt>.
    * @param y Location to store Y offset of layout, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
@@ -216,8 +210,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * To remove marks from a scale, use clear_marks().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
-   * 
    * @param value The value at which the mark is placed, must be between 
    * the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment.
    * @param position Where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, Gtk::POS_TOP
@@ -229,8 +221,6 @@ public:
   void add_mark(double value, PositionType position, const Glib::ustring& markup);
   
   /** Removes any marks that have been added with add_mark().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    */
   void clear_marks();
   

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scalebutton.h

@@ -53,7 +53,6 @@ namespace Gtk
  * for this use case.
  *
  * @ingroup Widgets
- * @newin{2,12}
  */
 
 class ScaleButton : public Button
@@ -120,15 +119,11 @@ public:
   /** Sets the icons to be used by the scale button.
    * For details, see the Gtk::ScaleButton::property_icons() property.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param icons A <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of icon names.
    */
   void set_icons(const Glib::StringArrayHandle& icons);
   
   /** Gets the current value of the scale button.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
    * 
    * @return Current value of the scale button.
    */
@@ -139,8 +134,6 @@ public:
    * inside them. The scale button emits the Gtk::ScaleButton::signal_value_changed()
    * signal if the value changes.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param value New value of the scale button.
    */
   void set_value(double value);
@@ -151,8 +144,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Gtk::Adjustment associated with the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale.
    * See Gtk::Range::get_adjustment() for details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The adjustment associated with the scale.
    */
   Gtk::Adjustment* get_adjustment();
@@ -166,8 +157,6 @@ public:
   /** Gets the Gtk::Adjustment associated with the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale.
    * See Gtk::Range::get_adjustment() for details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @return The adjustment associated with the scale.
    */
   Gtk::Adjustment* get_adjustment() const;
@@ -178,8 +167,6 @@ public:
    * for the Gtk::ScaleButton's scale.
    * See Gtk::Range::set_adjustment() for details.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,12}
-   * 
    * @param adjustment A Gtk::Adjustment.
    */
   void set_adjustment(Gtk::Adjustment& adjustment);
@@ -187,8 +174,6 @@ public:
   // TODO: Should be deprecated, but we have no replacement yet, until we break ABI.
   
   /** Gets the orientation of the Gtk::ScaleButton's popup window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Orientable::get_orientation() instead.
    * 
@@ -197,8 +182,6 @@ public:
   Orientation get_orientation();
   
   /** Sets the orientation of the Gtk::ScaleButton's popup window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * Deprecated: 2.16: Use Gtk::Orientable::set_orientation() instead.
    * 
@@ -208,48 +191,36 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */
   Widget* get_plus_button();
   
   /** Retrieves the plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The plus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */
   const Widget* get_plus_button() const;
   
   /** Retrieves the minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */
   Widget* get_minus_button();
   
   /** Retrieves the minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The minus button of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */
   const Widget* get_minus_button() const;
   
   /** Retrieves the popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */
   Gtk::Widget* get_popup();
   
   /** Retrieves the popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The popup of the Gtk::ScaleButton.
    */

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/scrolledwindow.h

@@ -226,8 +226,6 @@ public:
    * 
    * See also set_placement() and
    * get_placement().
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    */
   void unset_placement();
   
@@ -261,8 +259,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Returns the vertical scrollbar of @a scrolled_window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return The vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if it does not have one.
@@ -270,8 +266,6 @@ public:
   VScrollbar* get_vscrollbar();
   
   /** Returns the vertical scrollbar of @a scrolled_window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return The vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if it does not have one.
@@ -280,8 +274,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the horizontal scrollbar of @a scrolled_window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return The horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if it does not have one.
@@ -289,8 +281,6 @@ public:
   HScrollbar* get_hscrollbar();
   
   /** Returns the horizontal scrollbar of @a scrolled_window.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return The horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window,
    * or <tt>0</tt> if it does not have one.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/selectiondata.h

@@ -126,8 +126,6 @@ public:
    * The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
    *  @a selection_data->target.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param pixbuf A Gdk::Pixbuf.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the selection was successfully set,
    * otherwise <tt>false</tt>.
@@ -135,8 +133,6 @@ public:
   bool set_pixbuf(const Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf>& pixbuf);
   
   /** Gets the contents of the selection data as a Gdk::Pixbuf.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return If the selection data contained a recognized
    * image type and it could be converted to a Gdk::Pixbuf, a 
@@ -146,8 +142,6 @@ public:
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Pixbuf> get_pixbuf();
   
   /** Gets the contents of the selection data as a Gdk::Pixbuf.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
    * 
    * @return If the selection data contained a recognized
    * image type and it could be converted to a Gdk::Pixbuf, a 
@@ -163,8 +157,6 @@ public:
    * The string is converted to the form determined by
    *  @a selection_data->target.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param uris A <tt>0</tt>-terminated array of strings holding URIs.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if the selection was successfully set,
    * otherwise <tt>false</tt>.
@@ -175,23 +167,17 @@ public:
    * 
    * @return If the selection data contains a list of
    * URIs, a container containing the URIs, otherwise an empty container.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,6}.
    */
   Glib::StringArrayHandle get_uris() const;
 
 
   /** Retrieves the raw data of the selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The raw data of the selection.
    */
   const guchar* get_data() const;
   
   /** Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The length of the data of the selection.
    */
@@ -202,16 +188,12 @@ public:
   //TODO: Change the return type to std::string, when we can break ABI:
   
   /** Retrieves the selection Gdk::Atom of the selection data.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,16}
    * 
    * @return The selection Gdk::Atom of the selection data.
    */
   GdkAtom get_selection() const;
 
   /** Retrieves the target of the selection.
-   *
-   * @newin{2,14}
    **/
   std::string get_target() const;
   
@@ -226,8 +208,6 @@ public:
   
 
   /** Retrieves the format of the selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The format of the selection.
    */
@@ -235,16 +215,12 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Retrieves the display of the selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The display of the selection.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Display> get_display();
   
   /** Retrieves the display of the selection.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
    * 
    * @return The display of the selection.
    */
@@ -255,8 +231,6 @@ public:
    * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to
    * provide a list or URIs.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a selection_data holds a list of targets,
    * and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise <tt>false</tt>.
    */
@@ -275,8 +249,6 @@ public:
    * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to
    * provide rich text.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
-   * 
    * @param buffer A Gtk::TextBuffer.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a selection_data holds a list of targets,
    * and a suitable target for rich text is included,
@@ -288,8 +260,6 @@ public:
    * determines if any of the targets in @a targets can be used to
    * provide a Gdk::Pixbuf.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,6}
-   * 
    * @param writable Whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
    * how to convert a pixbuf into the format.
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a selection_data holds a list of targets,

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/separatortoolitem.h

@@ -114,8 +114,6 @@ public:
   /** Returns whether @a item is drawn as a line, or just blank. 
    * See set_draw().
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if @a item is drawn as a line, or just blank.
    */
   bool get_draw() const;
@@ -124,8 +122,6 @@ public:
    * Setting this to <tt>false</tt> along with Gtk::ToolItem::set_expand() is useful
    * to create an item that forces following items to the end of the toolbar.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,4}
-   * 
    * @param draw Whether @a item is drawn as a vertical line.
    */
   void set_draw(bool draw =  true);

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/settings.h

@@ -116,8 +116,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Gets the Gtk::Settings object for @a screen, creating it if necessary.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,2}
    * 
    * @param screen A Gdk::Screen.
    * @return A Gtk::Settings object.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/sizegroup.h

@@ -180,16 +180,12 @@ public:
   /** Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
    * calculating the size.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
-   * 
    * @param ignore_hidden Whether unmapped widgets should be ignored
    * when calculating the size.
    */
   void set_ignore_hidden(bool ignore_hidden =  true);
   
   /** Returns if invisible widgets are ignored when calculating the size.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,8}
    * 
    * @return <tt>true</tt> if invisible widgets are ignored.
    */
@@ -217,8 +213,6 @@ public:
 
   
   /** Returns the list of widgets associated with @a size_group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A SList of
    * widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
@@ -226,8 +220,6 @@ public:
   Glib::SListHandle<Widget*> get_widgets();
   
   /** Returns the list of widgets associated with @a size_group.
-   * 
-   * @newin{2,10}
    * 
    * @return A SList of
    * widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.

libs/tk/ytkmm/ytkmm/gtkmm/socket.h

@@ -187,8 +187,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
    * been created inside of the socket.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The window of the plug if available, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<Gdk::Window> get_plug_window();
@@ -196,8 +194,6 @@ public:
   /** Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
    * been created inside of the socket.
    * 
-   * @newin{2,14}
-   * 
    * @return The window of the plug if available, or <tt>0</tt>.
    */
   Glib::RefPtr<const Gdk::Window> get_plug_window() const;